Genex U-net User Guide(PDF)-En

GENEX U-Net V300R008C00

User Guide Issue

01

Date

2012-08-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

GENEX U-Net User Guide

About This Document

About This Document This document provides the guides for installing and using the GENEX U-Net.

Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Version

GENEX U-Net

V300R008C00

Intended Audience The intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.

Change History 01 (2012-08-10) This is the first release of V300R008C00. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes. Content

Description

1.3 Main Window of the U-Net

The content descriptions are changed.

2.3 Installing a License Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


ii


About This Document

Content

Description

3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers 7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis

New.

6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group 6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results 6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an Entire Network Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire Network 8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template 8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results Setting Parameters for TRXs in GSM Cells

Delete.

Parameters for Setting Parameters of TRXs in a GSM Cell Whole document Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

The content of the document is optimized.


iii


About This Document

Organization 1 Introduction to the U-Net The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks. It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network. For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization. 2 Installing the U-Net Software This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall it. 3 LTE-FDD Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 4 LTE-TDD Network Planning The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on network planning in different scenarios. 5 GSM Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 6 UMTS Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet you network planning requirements. 7 CDMA Network Planning This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


iv


About This Document

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements. 9 FAQ This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net. 10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display. 11 Acronyms and Abbreviations This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.


v


About This Document

Convention

Description

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


vi


About This Document

Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


vii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Introduction to the U-Net.............................................................................................................1 1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................2 1.2 System Structure.................................................................................................................................................4 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net................................................................................................................................5

2 Installing the U-Net Software...................................................................................................14 2.1 Preparation for the Installation.........................................................................................................................15 2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program..................................................................................................................16 2.3 Installing a License...........................................................................................................................................19 2.4 Starting the U-Net.............................................................................................................................................21 2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program.............................................................................................................22

3 LTE-FDD Network Planning....................................................................................................23 3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning..........................................................................................................25 3.2 Creating a Project.............................................................................................................................................27 3.3 Importing Geographic Data..............................................................................................................................28 3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data....................................................................................................28 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly...........................................................................32 3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually.................................................................................34 3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level.......................................................................36 3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.....................................................................................37 3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters.............................................................................................................39 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.............................................................................40 3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode.............................................................................................42 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects..........................................................................................................................43 3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data..............................................................................................50 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands............................................................................................................62 3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models...............................................................................................62 3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models............................................................................................................66 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models................................................................................................................68 3.4.4 Setting Bands...........................................................................................................................................69 3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models...........................................................................................70 3.5 Adding a Device...............................................................................................................................................93 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


viii


Contents

3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data..........................................................................................................................93 3.5.2 Setting Antennas......................................................................................................................................97 3.5.3 Setting a TMA.........................................................................................................................................99 3.5.4 Setting Feeders......................................................................................................................................100 3.5.5 Creating Base Stations...........................................................................................................................100 3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas.........................................................................................................101 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................103 3.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................104 3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types..........................................................................................................105 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.................................................................................................................107 3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types........................................................................................................109 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................110 3.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................113 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................115 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................116 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................116 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................117 3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template........................................................................................119 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................121 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................122 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................122 3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................124 3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters...................................................................125 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................150 3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction.............................................................................................................150 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................156 3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................158 3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups..................................................................................................159 3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................161 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................162 3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................164 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................167 3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................171 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.............................................................................174 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.................................................................................................................174 3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction.....................................................................................177 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................181 3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation.............................................................................................181 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps...................................................................................................................192 3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group.....................................................................................................195 3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result...............................................................................................197 3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches...............................................................................205 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


ix


Contents

3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.......................................................................206 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.....................................................................................................230 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................230 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................235 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................237 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................245 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells......................................................................................................248 3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter Planning.........................................................253

4 LTE-TDD Network Planning..................................................................................................273 4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning........................................................................................................275 4.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................277 4.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................278 4.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................278 4.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................278 4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................279 4.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................279 4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types..........................................................................................................280 4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types........................................................................................................282 4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type...................................................................................................284 4.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................285 4.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................286 4.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................286 4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................286 4.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................286 4.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................286 4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template........................................................................................287 4.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................288 4.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................288 4.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................289 4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................289 4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters...................................................................290 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................307 4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction...........................................................................................307 4.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................313 4.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................315 4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group..............................................................................................316 4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................317 4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................318 4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................318 4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................318 4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................319 4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data..................................................................................................319 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


x


Contents

4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.......................................................................319 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................321 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters....................................................................................................321 4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................322 4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................322 4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................322 4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................322 4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning.............................................................................................................322

5 GSM Network Planning.......................................................................................................... 324 5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning................................................................................................................326 5.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................327 5.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................329 5.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................329 5.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................329 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters....................................................................................................................330 5.6.1 Setting MOS..........................................................................................................................................330 5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types..................................................................................................................331 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.........................................................................................................................333 5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types................................................................................................................335 5.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................336 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters..........................................................................................................................336 5.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................336 5.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................337 5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template...............................................................................................................337 5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically..................................................................................................338 5.7.5 Creating a Repeater...............................................................................................................................338 5.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................339 5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters................................................................................................................339 5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters...........................................................................340 5.8 GSM Prediction..............................................................................................................................................346 5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction...................................................................................................346 5.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................351 5.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................353 5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group........................................................................................................354 5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................355 5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................356 5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results..........................................................................................................357 5.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................361 5.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................361 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning ..................................................................................................................361 5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................361 5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................362 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xi


Contents

5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.........................................................................................................363 5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................................................364 5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning...........................................................................................368 5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups...............................................................................368 5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells..............................................................................370 5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................372 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................374 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................374 5.11 TSC Planning................................................................................................................................................375 5.11.1 Planning TSC.......................................................................................................................................376 5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result....................................................................................................377 5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...................................................................................380 5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................381 5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning..........................................................................................382 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning..............................................................................................................382 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result..............................................................................383 5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...........................................................384 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.......................385 5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect...................................................................................386

6 UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................................387 6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning.............................................................................................................389 6.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................391 6.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................392 6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................392 6.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................392 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters..................................................................................................................393 6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types.............................................................................................................................393 6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types................................................................................................................394 6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers.......................................................................................................................397 6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types.............................................................................................................398 6.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................399 6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................400 6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................400 6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table.................................................................................................................401 6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table................................................................................................402 6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table..............................................................................................403 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters........................................................................................................................404 6.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................404 6.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................404 6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.................................................................................................405 6.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................406 6.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................406 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xii


Contents

6.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................407 6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters.............................................................................................................407 6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters.........................................................................408 6.8 UMTS Prediction............................................................................................................................................415 6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction.................................................................................................415 6.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................420 6.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................422 6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group......................................................................................................423 6.8.5 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................424 6.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................425 6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results.......................................................................................................426 6.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................431 6.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................431 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells...............................................................................................................431 6.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................431 6.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................432 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network..........................................................................433 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.........................................................434 6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network...................................................436 6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration..................................................................437 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning...............................................................................................................444 6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning................................................................................444 6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network.............................................................446 6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration................................................................448 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis........................................................................................................452 6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group................................................................................452 6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results....................................................453 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis............................................................................................455 6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics.......................................................................................455 6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.................................................................................456 6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.....................................................457 6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results.................................................................................459 6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................460 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.............................................................................461 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells............................................................................462 6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................465 6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................467 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................468 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes............................................................................468 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes ...........................................471 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results........................................472 6.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands..............................................................................................................472 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xiii


Contents

6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.....................................................473 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.........................475 6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.......................................................475 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results...........................478 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results........................................................479

7 CDMA Network Planning.......................................................................................................482 7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning............................................................................................................484 7.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................485 7.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................487 7.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................487 7.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................487 7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters.......................................................................................................................487 7.6.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................487 7.6.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................488 7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template...............................................................................................488 7.6.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................489 7.6.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................489 7.6.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................489 7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters............................................................................................................489 7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters........................................................................490 7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning...............................................................................................................494 7.7.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................494 7.7.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................495 7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells......................................................................................................496 7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................497 7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning.............................................................................................................................501 7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes.............................................................................................................501 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes................................................................................................................................502 7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results....................................................................................................502 7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes..........................................................................................505 7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning..........................................................................................506 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.......................................................................................................506 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.............................................................................507 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes.................................................................507 7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.............................................................................508 7.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells....................................................510 7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations...................511 7.9.7 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................512 7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results........................................................................512

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning..............................................................................................514 8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning.....................................................................................................516 8.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................517 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xiv


Contents

8.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................519 8.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................519 8.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................519 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network...............................................................................520 8.6.1 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................520 8.6.2 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................520 8.6.3 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................520 8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types........................................................................................................520 8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types.....................................................................................................522 8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters...............................................................................................................523 8.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................523 8.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................523 8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template.......................................................................................524 8.7.4 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................525 8.7.5 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................526 8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters.....................................................................................................526 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network........................................................................................526 8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..............................................526 8.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................529 8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network...................................................531 8.8.4 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................532 8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................532 8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results...................................................................................................................533 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..........................534 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network...................................................................................536 8.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................536 8.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................537 8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network........................................................................538 8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................539 8.9.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................543

9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................545 9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................547 9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............547 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................548 9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 ..............................................................................................................................................................................550 9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................551 9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................553 9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly ..............................................................................................................................................................................554 9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................555 9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................555 Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xv


Contents

10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................................557 10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map.....................................................................................560 10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map...................................................................................................................561 10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points......................................................................................561 10.4 Querying the Legend Information................................................................................................................562 10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth...........................................................................................................563 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties..................................................................................................................564 10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers..........................................................................................................567 10.8 Managing Table Windows............................................................................................................................568 10.9 Managing Docked Windows........................................................................................................................570 10.10 Managing the Explorer Window................................................................................................................571 10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs........................................................................................................572 10.12 Searching Sites and Cells...........................................................................................................................572 10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells............................................................................................................................573 10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon......................................................................................................................576 10.15 Printing Planning Results...........................................................................................................................577 10.15.1 Print Suggestions...............................................................................................................................577 10.15.2 Printing Maps....................................................................................................................................577 10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template...........................................................................................................578 10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models.................................................................................................................579 10.16.1 Importing DT Data............................................................................................................................579 10.16.2 Filtering DT Data...............................................................................................................................580 10.16.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches.............................................................................................................581 10.16.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data............................................582 10.16.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model.............................................................584 10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................585 10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.........................................................................585 10.17.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields...............................................................................................586 10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations......................................................................................586 10.17.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties..................................................................................587 10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data...................................................................................590 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties........................................................................................591 10.17.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data........................................................................................593 10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data..........................................................................596 10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.................................................................................598 10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models.................................................599 10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data..............................................................................................600 10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points...........................................................602

11 Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................603

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


xvi


1 Introduction to the U-Net

1

Introduction to the U-Net

About This Chapter The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks. It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network. For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization. 1.1 Overview The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage, capacity, and quality. 1.2 System Structure The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS), service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation, parameter planning, and analysis result output. 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD network system is selected.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


1



1.1 Overview The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage, capacity, and quality.

Positioning Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network. Figure 1-1 Position of the U-Net on the network

Entity

Description

Probe

The Probe is a type of DT software developed by Huawei. It is used for collecting air interface parameters on the wireless network. The DT data and CW data collected by the Probe can be imported to the U-Net for calibrating propagation models and comparing the actual network coverage and predicted network coverage during network planning.

CME

The Configuration Management Express (CME) is used to configure and manage the data of NEs.

U-Net

The U-Net is a type of network planning software developed by Huawei. It supports the LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD, GSM, UMTS, and CDMA network systems.

Product Features The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture, an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs. These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly. l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Advanced LTE planning simulation technology Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2



The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI) codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it provides professional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advanced technologies of both Huawei and leading operators. l

Advanced planning algorithms The U-Net helps users flexibly perform co-planning of GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD networks, thus appropriately making use of existing site resources. This accelerates the product delivery and shortens the network deployment period.

l

Advanced semi-dynamic simulation technology By providing high-accuracy network prediction, the U-Net helps to accurately estimate network investment and provide a low-cost solution, thus effectively reducing the overall costs of network deployment.

l

Powerful and easy-to-use network planning function The U-Net provides mature algorithms for inter-RAT neighboring cell planning and easy settings of planning parameters. This improves work efficiency effectively by reducing the technical requirements on network optimization and ensures the quality of network planning.

Application Scenario The U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion. During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineering parameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidance for the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network, the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization by comparing the network performance before and after the optimization. Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net. Table 1-1 Functions provided by the U-Net in different scenarios

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Function

Description

Site deployment

After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quickly deployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing point analysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height along the profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.

Propagation model calibration

The propagation model can be adjusted manually or automatically on the basis of the CW data. The U-Net displays the model on the GIS to analyze the error in the model-based calculation.

Network parameter planning

The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, such as parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs, and TAs.

Prediction

The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuring network data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing the prediction result, it evaluates the network performance.


3



Function

Description

Capacity simulation

After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is set according to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculation based on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes the throughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage of common channels and traffic channels based on the specific network load provided in the simulation calculation results.

Interaction with the CME

You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then import them to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results provided by the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to the network.

1.2 System Structure The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS), service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation, parameter planning, and analysis result output. Figure 1-2 shows the software architecture of the U-Net. Figure 1-2 Software architecture of the U-Net

The U-Net system consists of the following parts: Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


4



l

Platform This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such as project management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. The U-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. In addition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functions of different network systems.

l

System application This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameter planning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planning mainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.

1.3 Main Window of the U-Net This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD network system is selected. Figure 1-3 shows the main window after you start the U-Net. Table 1-2 lists the items in the main window. Figure 1-3 Main window of the U-Net

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


5



Table 1-2 Description of the main window No.

Name

Description

1

Menu bar

Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar.

2

Standard toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to projects. For details, see Standard Toolbar.

3

Task toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to tasks. For details, see Task Toolbar.

4

Explorer window

Provides the entries to main operations using a navigation tree. For details, see Explorer Window.

5

Event window

Displays the information about the progress of operation tasks when the U-Net is running.

6

Map window

Displays the map.

7

System status bar

Displays the information about the system status.

Menu Bar The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based on the main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations. Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions. Table 1-3 Description of the menu bar Main Menu

Description

File

Provides entries to operations related to project management and print management. For details, see Table 1-4.

Edit

Provides entries for viewing analysis GUIs. For details, see Table 1-5.

Window

Provides entries to common map-related operations. For details, see Table 1-6.

Help

Provides entries to U-Net Help and license management. For details, see Table 1-7.

Table 1-4 Description of the File menu

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Menu Item

Description

New

Create a project.

Open

Open an existing project. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6



Menu Item

Description

Close

Close a project.

Save

Save the current project.

Save As

Save the current project as another one.

Print Setting

Set print properties.

Print Preview

Preview a print task.

Print

Start a print task.

Import Excel

Import existing planning data, such as base station data and propagation model data.

Generate Template

Create an engineering parameter template. 1. Click Generate Template. In the displayed dialog box, select a network type in the Select Network Type area. 2. Select required engineering parameters for the selected network type in the Select Specific Parameters area and select engineering parameters under the Site and Transceiver nodes in the navigation tree. 3. Specify the export path and click Export. The settings are saved as an engineering parameter template. View the names of the five projects that are opened recently.

Recent File

This menu item provides shortcut operation entries to the five projects. Exit

Exit the U-Net.

Table 1-5 Description of the Edit menu Menu Item

Description

Undo

Undo an operation. You can undo the modifications in the GIS window. Note that you can perform a maximum of three undo operations at a time. You cannot undo the modifications in the property window.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Resource Usage

View the resource usage.

Show Grid Line

Whether to display grid lines.

Find

Search NEs.


7



Table 1-6 Description of the Window menu Menu Item

Description

Project Information

Display or hide the explorer window.

Standard Toolbar

Display or hide the standard toolbar.

Status Bar

Display or hide the status bar.

Event

Display or hide the event window. When network planning, coverage prediction, or capacity simulation is performed, the Event Viewer window automatically docks at the lower left part of the main window.

Legend

Display or hide the legend window.

Simulation Curve

Display or hide the capacity simulation process window.

Point Analysis Tool

Display or hide the point analysis window.

Table 1-7 Description of the Help menu Menu Item

Description

Help Topics

View the U-Net Help.

Apply License for self

Apply for a license for yourself.

Apply License for others

Apply for a license for others.

View ESN

View the electronic serial number (ESN).

About License

View the remaining valid days of a license.

Update License

Update a license locally.

About U-Net

View the U-Net software information.

Standard Toolbar You can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-related operation quickly. Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown in Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Standard toolbar

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


8


1 Introduction to the U-Net NOTE

You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.

Table 1-8 Description of the standard toolbar Icon

Description Create a project. Open a project. Save a project. Perform a print task. View the U-Net software information.

Task Toolbar You can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the map and point analysis. Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure 1-5. Figure 1-5 Task toolbar

Table 1-9 Description of the task toolbar Icon

Description Calculate the path loss. Forcibly calculate the path loss. Stop calculating the path loss. Start the point analysis. Select a base station template. Create base stations in batches. Create a base station.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


9



Icon

Description Create a repeater. Whether to display hexagons indicating cell coverage. Select a rectangular area. Center the map. Refresh the map. Select one item at a time. Move a map. Select a scaling. Zoom in or zoom out on the map. Zoom out on an area. Measure the distance. Draw a polygon. Draw a line. Draw a point. Combine polygons. Export a map to the Google Earth. View detailed results. For example, after performing the coverage prediction, you can select a coverage prediction counter in the explorer window, click , and move the pointer to the map window to view detailed results of the counter. Draw a clutter analysis line.

Explorer Window The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tab pages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


10



Figure 1-6 GEO tab page

Table 1-10 Description of the GEO tab page Navigation Tree

Description

Special Polygons

Operation tasks related to special polygons.

Polygons

Operation tasks related to polygons.

Points

Operation tasks related to points.

Lines

Operation tasks related to lines.

Map

Operation tasks related to maps.

NOTE

In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about the node is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of Polygons as shown in

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

, polygons are displayed in the GIS window.


11



Figure 1-7 Data tab page

Table 1-11 Description of the Data tab page Navigation Tree

Description

Propagation Models

Operation tasks related to propagation models.

CW Measurement

Operation tasks related to the CW measurement data.

Drive Test

Operation tasks related to the drive test data.

Antennas

Operation tasks related to antennas.

Antenna Groups

Operation tasks related to antenna groups.

Traffic Parameters

Operation tasks related to traffic parameters.

Traffic Map

Operation tasks related to traffic maps.

Figure 1-8 Network tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


12



Table 1-12 Description of the Network tab page Navigation Tree

Description

Site

Operation tasks related to sites.

Transceiver

Operation tasks related to transceivers.

Figure 1-9 Operation tab page

Table 1-13 Description of the Operation tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Navigation Tree

Description

Predictions

Operation tasks related to predictions.

Simulations

Operation tasks related to capacity simulation.

Neighbor Planning

Operation tasks related to neighboring cell planning.

LTE PCI Planning

Operation tasks related to PCI planning.

LTE PRACH Planning

Operation tasks related to PRACH planning.

LTE Frequency Planning

Operation tasks related to frequency planning.

LTE TAC Planning

Operation tasks related to TAC planning.

LTE Cell Planning

Operation tasks related to LTE cell planning.


13


2 Installing the U-Net Software

2

Installing the U-Net Software

About This Chapter This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall it. 2.1 Preparation for the Installation Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met. For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements. 2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes. 2.3 Installing a License This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. 2.4 Starting the U-Net You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted. 2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


14



2.1 Preparation for the Installation Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met. For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.

Hardware Requirements Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC. Table 2-1 Hardware requirements Config uration Item

Recommended Configuration

Minimum Configuration

CPU

Intel dual-core 2.0 GHz

P3 1GHz

Memor y

2 GB

512 MB

Hard Disk

15 GB at least

1 GB at least

Monitor

1280 x 1024 resolution

1024 x 768 resolution

Miscell aneous

DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and keyboard

DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and keyboard

Software Requirements Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC. Table 2-2 Software requirements Configurati on Item

How to Obtain


Remarks

Operating system (OS)

-

Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher

Mandatory

Environment components

-

l Microsoft .NET Framework4.0 or higher

Mandatory

l Microsoft Windows Installer3.1 or higher Operating software

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

-

Microsoft Office 2003 or higher


Mandatory

15



Configurati on Item

How to Obtain


Remarks

GENEX UNet software installation package

l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.com.

l You have a user account at http:// support.huawei.com and have the permission to download the GENEX UNet software installation package.

Mandatory

l Obtain the GENEX UNet installation DVDROM.

l You have obtained the GENEX U-Net software. License

Contact Huawei technical support engineers to obtain the license.

-

Mandatory

2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.

Prerequisites NOTE

l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1 Preparation for the Installation. l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net software must be installed by using an administrator account.

Context The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installation package is classified into four types. l

If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework). Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.

l

If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework). Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.

Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs to ensure successful installation of the U-Net main program. This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedure of the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


16



Procedure Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei. Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package. Step 2 Double-click Huawei.UNet32.exe to display the setup wizard. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name. Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components. Step 9 Click Next. Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path. Step 11 After confirmation, click Install. If you want to...

Then...

Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software. After the installation is complete, it is recommended that you restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to check whether the U-Net is installed successfully. Display the .NET Framework setup wizard

Follow the prompts to install the software.

Step 12 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 13 Check whether the U-Net main program is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei GENEX > U-Net 3.8 to check whether the information about the U-Net software exists. If...

Then...

The U-Net software information exists

The U-Net main program is successfully installed.

The U-Net software information does not exist

Repeat Step 1 through Step 13 until the U-Net main program is successfully installed.

Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net main program is installed. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


17



Table 2-3 U-Net installation folder structure

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Directory

Description

Adjust

Saves rectification parameters for the radio propagation model.

Antenna

Saves antenna data.

config

Saves the configuration file.

CoMP

Saves the configuration parameters of the CoMP gain.

IRC

Saves the configuration parameters of the IRC gain.

iScript

Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).

Measure Report

Saves the configuration parameters for geographic display of MR data.

Data

Saves the default configuration parameters of the project.

Gis

Saves the default configuration parameters of the GIS.

NbrPlanning

Saves various parameter templates for neighbor cell planning.

License

Saves the license file.

Prediction

Saves the default configuration parameters of the prediction.

Propagation

Saves the default configuration parameters of the propagation model.

RF

Saves the parameter template for LTE Cell planning.

RuleStore

Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).

Simulation

Saves the default configuration parameters of the capacity simulation.

ToolInfo

Saves the interface configuration information for domain verification.

TSCPlannin g

Saves the parameter template information for TSC planning.

NetEntity

Saves the related network information.

Network Expansion

Saves the parameters for six-sector expansion of UMTS.

Help

Saves the Help files of the U-Net.

Resource

Saves the template files required by the U-Net.

Resources

Saves the resource files required by the U-Net.

Log

Saves operation logs.

Temp

Saves the calculation results of path loss, prediction, and capacity simulation.


NOTE The two folders are generated only after the U-Net software runs.

18



----End

2.3 Installing a License This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.

Procedure l

Apply for a license for yourself. 1.

In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The Domain Authentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Domain Authentication

2.

Enter the domain account information.

3.

Click OK. NOTE

If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.

4. l

Apply for a license for others. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for others. The Offline License Application dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.


19



Figure 2-2 Off-line License Application

2.

In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters. Table 2-4 Parameters in the Off-line License Application dialog box Parameter

Description

Set the save path of License file

Save path of the license file.

Input the ESNs of authorized computers

ESN of your PC. NOTE You can choose Help > View ESN in the main window of the U-Net to learn the ESN.

Select tools and versions to authorize by License

U-Net version for domain authentication.

3.

Click Next.

4.

Enter the domain account information in the displayed Domain Authentication dialog box.

5.

Click OK.

6.

After domain authentication succeeds, click Submit. NOTE

After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to a specified local path.

7.

Update a license locally. a.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The Update License dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20



Figure 2-3 Update License

8.

b.

Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.

c.

Click Update License.

After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.

----End

Follow-up Procedure After loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view the remaining valid days of the license.

2.4 Starting the U-Net You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.

Prerequisites When the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installation directory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directory before starting the U-Net. Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission information on the Security tab page.

Procedure l

Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software. Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by doubleclicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

If ...

Then ...

A correct license file is loaded

The U-Net is started.


21



If ...

Then ...

No license file is loaded

A message is displayed, indicating that no license file is loaded. Obtain the license file and then load the license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing a License. After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.

An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the license file is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file and then load the license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing a License. After loading the license file, restart the U-Net. ----End

2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.

Context The license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when the U-Net is being uninstalled.

Procedure Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs. Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8. Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall. Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish. You can restart the PC as required. ----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


22


3 LTE-FDD Network Planning

3

LTE-FDD Network Planning

About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net. 3.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 3.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 3.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


23



Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction. 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report. 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network through the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


24



3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net. Figure 3-1 shows the process of LTE-FDD network planning. Figure 3-1 Process of LTE-FDD network planning

Table 3-1describes the detailed information about Figure 3-1. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


25



Table 3-1 Description of the LTE-FDD network planning process No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project

For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.

2

Importing geographic data

You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.

3

Managing propagation models and bands

The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.

4

Adding a device

You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

5

Setting traffic parameters

Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters.

6

Setting NE parameters

You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters.

7

Calculating the path loss

For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.

8

Predicting network performance

For details, see 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction.

9

Planning PCI/ frequency/ neighboring cells/ PRACH/TAC

For details, see 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.

10

Creating a traffic map

For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.

11

Performing capacity simulation

For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.

Exporting network planning results

For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell Planning.

12

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

The planning results can be applied to NEs.

The capacity simulation results can be applied to prediction.


26



3.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.

Context l

Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds to the network planning for an area or a city.

l

One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems. For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid network.

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Project Templates

Step 2 Select a project template. l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an appropriate project template based on the actual network system. l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks. l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems. Step 3 Click OK. ----End

Follow-up Procedure l

Save a project file. Choose File > Save or click file.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

to save all the information about the project in a project


27



You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE

Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.

l

Open an existing project file. Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file. NOTE

Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.

3.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.

3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data This section describes the basic knowledge of the geographic data, such as data type, data format, and coordinate system.

Geographic Data The U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can import geographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format. The two types of geographic data are described as follows: l

DEM data: It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value of the ground elevation.

l

DTM data: It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.

The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents the above-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM data represents only the terrain height.

Geographic Data in Planet Files Planet files save the data about the altitude, clutter class, clutter height, vector, point layer, and geographic projection. Table 3-2 shows the relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types. Each layer corresponds to several Planet file types. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


28



Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types Planet File Type

Layer Type

Description

Point Layer File

Text Layer (Point Layer)

Point layer files save the identification data of each typical land mark (such as a town). Point layer files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each land mark. l Menu file: saves land mark numbers and names. l Text file: saves the information about a land mark.

Vector File

Vector Layer

Vector files save the information about terrain features such as roads, railways, streets, and streams. Vector files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each vector. l Menu file: saves vector numbers and names. l Terrain feature file: saves the information about each terrain feature. The information about each terrain feature must be saved in an individual vector file.

Clutter Height File

Buildings Layer (Layer of Clutter and Building Heights)

Clutter height files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each binary data file. l Binary data file: saves the clutter heights at each geographic location on the map.

Clutter Class File

Clutter Layer (Clutter Class Layer)

Clutter class files consist of the following types of files: l Index file: saves the geographic location information about each clutter. l Menu file: saves clutter class numbers and names. l Binary data file: saves the information about the terrain (such as forests, lakes, flat open areas, urban areas, and high buildings) for calculating the path loss.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


29



Planet File Type

Layer Type

Description

Altitude File

Heights Layer (Altitude Layer)

Altitude files consist of the following types of files: l Index file (ASCII text file): saves the geographic location information about each binary data file. l Binary data file: saves the data about the height (excluding the height of the building) above the sea level of each geographic location in the map.

Geographic Projection File

Generally, the geographic projection file is stored in the folder of altitude files. The file name is projection.

The geographic projection file is in .txt format. It includes the required projection information, such as the projection mode, information about the ellipsoid, and information about the coordinate offset.

Geographic Data in Shape Files Shape files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features in binary mode. Shape file is a map file format developed by the ESRI company. Shape files save space data and can be opened by using the ArcExplorer. Shape files consist of .shp, .shx and .dbf files. l

The .shp file saves the geographic data.

l

The .shx file saves the index information about the geographic data in the .shp file.

l

The .dbf (dBASE) file saves the feature information about each record.

Geographic Data in Vertical Mapper Files Vertical Mapper file is a type of charting file for satellite remote sensing. Vertical Mapper files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features. The U-Net supports the Vertical Mapper files in the same way as it supports the Planet files. Vertical Mapper files consist of .grc files and .grd files. l

The .grc file corresponds to the raster map with discrete values, such as the raster map of clutter classes.

l

The .grd file corresponds to the raster map with continuous values, such as the raster map of altitudes.

Geographic Data in MIF Files MIF files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features in ASCII format. MIF files can be imported to the U-Net and can be displayed on the U-Net as a type of Shape data. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


30



MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on all the platforms supported by the MapInfo software. MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files. l

The .mif file consists of the file header and the data. – The file header contains the information about projection and boundary. – The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.

l

The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file. The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.

Geographic Data in .bil Files l

The .bil files save the binary DEM data.

l

The .hdr file is the header file of a .bil file and saves the information about a .bil file such as the number of bytes, storage mode, number of rows, and number of columns.

l

The save path of a .bil file must contain an .hdr file that has the same prefix name as the .bil file.

Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format) l

A .tab file in grid format specifies the table structure of map attribute data, including the number of fields, field names, field types, field widths, index fields, and key space information about corresponding layers.

l

The save path of a .tab file in grid format must contain the .grc or .grd file specified in the .tab file.

l

You can open a .tab file in .txt format and query the name of the .grc or .grd file specified in the .tab file.

Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format) l

The .tab file in vector format is a type of map file developed by the MapInfo company.

l

The save path of a .tab file in vector format must contain the .dat, .id, and .map files that have the same prefix name as the .tab file. For example, the save path of the River.tab file must contain the River.dat, River.id, and River.map files.Otherwise, the U-Net cannot successfully import the geographic data in this format.

Coordinate Systems This section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.

Projection and Ellipsoid A map or a geographic database is a flat representation of data collected from a curved surface. A projection is a means for presenting all or part of a spheroid on a plane. The projection cannot be done without distortion. Therefore, you must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area, or shape) to be presented accurately at the expense of the other characteristics or make a compromise between several characteristics. Then, different projection methods are formed. The ellipsoid is the pattern used to model the earth. It is defined by its geometric parameters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


31



Classification of Coordinate Systems To determine a geographic location, you need to identify the location by using coordinates. In different coordinate systems, however, the coordinates for the same location are different. Currently, the U-Net uses two types of coordinate systems, that is, the geodetic coordinate system and the longitude/latitude coordinate system. l

Geodetic coordinate system Considering the Earth as a plane, you can create a right-angle coordinate system by taking a point of the Earth as the origin, the east direction as the positive direction of the X-axis, and the north direction as the positive direction of the Y-axis. All the points of the plane are in the first quadrant of the coordinate system. Then, a geographic location can be identified by a pair of coordinates (x, y). This pair of coordinates is called geodetic coordinates. Geodetic coordinates are continuous values. The unit is meter.

l

Longitude/Latitude coordinate system The spherical location can be identified by using the longitude/latitude coordinate system. Values on the longitude and latitude coordinates are continuous. – The longitude of a point refers to the angle between the local meridian and the prime meridian. The east of the prime meridian is the east longitude (180 degrees) and the west of the prime meridian is the west longitude (180 degrees). – The latitude of a point refers to the angle between the normal line of the corresponding geographic point on the ellipsoid and the equator. The north of the equator is called north latitude (90 degrees) and the south of the equator is called south latitude (90 degrees).

3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly This section describes how to import geographic data in planet format quickly. By using this method, you can import multiple graphic layer files in batches at a time.

Prerequisites l

In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.

l

After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognized by the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer must include an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in each graphic layer, see Geographic Data.

l

After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized by the system.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map. Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


32



Figure 3-3 Quick Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a digital e-map folder. Step 5 Click OK. The Import Map dialog box is displayed. The system automatically recognizes and matches the data files in the digital e-map folder, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


33



Figure 3-4 Import Map Dialog Box

to modify the file path or reStep 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format. Step 7 Click OK. The import of the geographic data is complete. The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can also choose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layer data. ----End

3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually This section describes how to manually import each sub-graphic layer data file. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


34



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.

CAUTION Before selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may fail to import the file.

Table 3-3 Description of Sub-Graphic Layer File Types Graphic Layer Type

Available File Type

Description

Satellitic (navigation map)

l .png

l When you select a .shp file, there must be a .dbf file with the same prefix name under the file path. Otherwise, you cannot view geographic feature information. l If an Index file is selected, the folder where the selected file is located must contain other related files.For the files included in each layer, see Geographic Data in Planet Files. l When you select a .bil file, there must be a .hdr file with the same prefix name under the file path. If you import a .bil file in the Clutter layer, you need to import a .mnu file with the same prefix name. l When you select a .tab file and meanwhile import it in the Vector layer, there must be .dat, .id, and .map files with the same prefix name under the file path. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format). l If a TAB file is selected and the data is imported to the clutter layer, the folder where the selected file is located must contain a GRC file. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format).

l .bmp l .jpg

Geometry

l .shp l .mif

Text

Index File

Vector

l Index File l .tab

Buildings

l Index File l .bil

Clutter

l Index File l .bil l .grc l .tab

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


35



Graphic Layer Type

Available File Type

Description

Heights

l Index File

l When you select a .tab file and meanwhile import it in the Heights layer, there must be a .grd file under the file path. For details, see Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format).

l .bil l .grd l .tab

You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches. Step 5 Click Open. Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters. 1.

For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps.

2.

Click Import.

----End

3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level When geographic data in the calculation area has multiple resolution levels, you must select the geographic data of a proper resolution level to ensure the accuracy of service planning.

Prerequisites Multiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.

Context On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows: l

If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on only the geographic area corresponding to this file.

l

If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for the overlapped geographic area.

l

When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, UNet selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of the geographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.

l

This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


36



In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, select the geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node. The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights. Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top. ----End

Example For example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have been imported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and 20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), drag the layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Heights layer

3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data This section describes how to set the display parameters of various geographic data. The U-Net enables you to set the color, the transparency, and the shading effect of clutters of different heights to clearly and vividly display the geographic data. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


37



Prerequisites The geographic data is imported.

Procedure l

Set the display parameters of each layer. This section takes the clutter layer as an example to describe how to set the display parameters. The settings of the display parameters for other layers are similar to the settings for the clutter layer. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data. 1.

In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.

2.

In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter > map name.

3.

Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-6. The Clutter dialog box is displayed. Figure 3-6 Properties

4.

Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter. NOTE

For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider in the lower left corner.

5.

Click OK. After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, you can view the refreshed window.

l

Display the heights layer in plastic mode. 1.

In the navigation tree, choose Map > Heights.

2.

Choose Relievo Style from the shortcut menu.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


38



3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters This section describes how to set radio propagation parameters for the clutter layer, such as penetration loss, spatial multiplexing factor, and standard deviation of shadow fading. These parameters can be used for coverage prediction and capacity simulation calculation.

Prerequisites The geographic data has been imported.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7 Clutter Parameters Display

Step 3 Set radio propagation parameters for each clutter. l Actual Value tab page: displays the parameters related to the imported map. l Default Value tab page: displays the default parameters when no map is imported. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer. Step 4 Click OK. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


39



3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data On the U-Net, each project corresponds to only one projection mode and one type of spheroid data. The projection mode and spheroid data have impacts on service analysis. This section describes two methods for setting the projection mode and spheroid data.

Procedure l

Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file. Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planet geographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode and spheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly. NOTE

If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify and import the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the following operations.

l

Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Map.

3.

Choose Coordinate from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems. If...

Then...

The required projection mode and spheroid data are available

1. Select a coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list. 2. Select a required file from multiple projection configuration files in this group. 3. Click Apply. The names of the current projection system and spheroid data are displayed in the Current Coordinate Setting window, as shown in Figure 3-8.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


40



If...

Then...

The required projection mode and spheroid data are unavailable

1. Select the favorite coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list. If the existing coordinate system groups cannot meet your requirement, click New Group to create a required coordinate system group. 2. Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed. 3. Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data. 4. Click Create. After the projection mode and spheroid data are created, the Coordinate Systems dialog box is displayed. 5. Select the new projection configuration file in the dialog box. 6. Click Apply.

Figure 3-8 Coordinate Systems dialog box

----End

Follow-up Procedure You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroid data. 1.


2.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


41



3.

Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

4.

Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data in the displayed dialog box.

5.

Click OK.

3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode The U-Net supports four modes for displaying coordinates. You can select the proper display mode of coordinates as required.


Context On the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler. Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates. Table 3-4 Display modes of coordinates Display Mode

Meaning

Example

xy reference frame

Indicates the display mode of geodetic coordinates.

442472.51

xxdxxmxx.xxsS

Indicates the display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates in the format of xx degree.xx minute.xx second.

116°19′45″E

xx.xxxxxS

Indicates the ESWN display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates.

116.32E

-xx.xxxxx

Indicates the negative/ positive display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates.

116.32

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map. Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu. If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available. Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box. BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


42



l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value of this parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed. l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can be changed as required. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects You can either import or create vector objects, such as points, lines, and polygons. Vectors are mainly used for display and service calculation. As a type of vector, polygons can be used as filters, computation zones, and print zones.

Basic Knowledge of Calculation Areas This section describes the relations between a created calculation area and the base stations that are actually involved in the prediction.

Common Polygonal Areas This section takes Figure 3-9 as an example. Figure 3-9 Example of a calculation area

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


43



In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activated base station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice the cell radius. The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. For example, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue rectangle.

Linear Polygonal Areas This section takes Figure 3-10 as an example. Figure 3-10 Example of a calculation area

In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is in blue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated base station is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice the cell radius. The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. For example, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they are considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue rectangle.

Importing and Exporting a Polygon You can import polygon files in different formats, such as .xml, .mif, .tab, .kml, and .kmz. You can also export an existing polygon from the system. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


44



Prerequisites To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitude coordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.

Context You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported. Step 5 Click Open and then import a polygon. ----End


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Export a polygon. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Polygons > a polygon.

3.

Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and then click OK.


45



Figure 3-12 Exporting Polygon dialog box

NOTE

If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.

5.

l

In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and then export a polygon. If...

Then...

Select the .mif format.

Two files are displayed under the saving path with the suffix names of .mif and .mid. The exported file contains projection information.

Select the .tab format.

Four files are displayed under the file path with the suffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab. The exported file contains projection information.

Select the .xml format.

An .xml file is displayed under the saving path.

Select the .kmz or .kml format.

An .xml or .kml file is displayed under the saving path. When you perform the operation in 4, select Longitude/ Latitude as the coordinate type. After that, the system can export the polygon in such format.

Export polygons in batches. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.

3.


4.

In the displayed dialog box, select the coordinate system and export type.

5.

Click OK.

6.

In the displayed dialog box, select a path to save the exported polygon files.

Drawing Polygons Directly This section describes how to draw polygons. You can draw new polygons, or export and edit the existing polygons.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


46



Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Polygon from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one. l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line, indicating that you are drawing this line. l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating that you have finished drawing this line. l You can right-click to exit. Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed. ----End

Follow-up Procedure View the clutter statistics of a polygon. After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree. Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter statistics of this polygon.

Creating Polygons Based on Lines This section describes how to create polygons based on lines. You can draw a line and create a polygon based on the line.

Procedure Step 1 Draw a line. 1.

on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Click Line from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click in the workspace to draw a straight line or a polygonal line. l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line, indicating that you are drawing this line. l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating that you have finished drawing this line. l You can right-click to exit.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to finish the drawing. NOTE

You can also click on the toolbar to create an independent point. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.

4.

Optional: Move or delete a line. Select a line in the map window and drag it to a new position.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


47



Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line. 5.

Optional: Add, delete, or edit a point of a line. Right-click a point of a line and choose Add Point, Delete Point, or Edit Point from the shortcut menu to add, delete, or edit the point.

Step 2 Set the extended polygon of a line. 1.


2.

Choose Lines > A line in the navigation tree.

3.

Right-click the line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the displayed dialog box, set the width of the extended polygon in the Strip Width area. The width ranges from 0 to 1000 meters.

5.

Click OK. Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on the two sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.

Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu to set the extended polygon of the line. ----End

Follow-up Procedure View the clutter statistics of a polygon. After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree. Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter statistics of this polygon.

Editing Polygons You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.

Procedure l

Edit a polygon. on the toolbar. The map window is selected.

1.

Click

2.

Edit a polygon. If you need to...

Then...

Move a point

1. Select a point of a polygon. 2. Drag this point to a new position. Alternatively, rightclick the point and choose Edit Point from the shortcut menu to change the coordinates as required.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


48



If you need to...

Then...

Add a point to a side

1. Select a side. 2. Right-click a position on the side where a point needs to be added. 3. Choose Add Point. A point is added to the side.

Delete a point

1. Right-click a point in a polygon. 2. Choose Delete Point.

Move a polygon

1. Select a polygon. 2. Drag the polygon to a new position.

Delete a polygon

1. Select a polygon. 2. Press Del. Alternatively, right-click a polygon and choose Delete Polygon from the shortcut menu. If the polygon is referenced, for example it is referenced by a vector-based traffic map, the system prompts that the polygon cannot be deleted.

NOTE

l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo the preceding operation. l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. The modifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.

l

Query and modify the properties of a polygon. 1.

Select a polygon in the map window.

2.


3.

Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon Properties dialog box. – Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page. – Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page. – Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page. – Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab page.

4. l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Click OK.

Combine polygons. 1.

on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window, Click right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.

2.

Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the Polygon Operator dialog box.


49



3.

If you need to...

Then...

Combine the overlapped areas of multiple polygons as a new polygon

1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the polygons to be combined.

Combine the combination areas of multiple polygons as a new polygon

1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the polygons to be combined.

Exclude the overlapped area of two polygons from one polygon to form a new polygon based on the remaining area of this polygon.

1. Select one polygon from the left area in the Current Polygons window.

2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.

2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.

2. Select Exclude. 3. Select another polygon from the right area in the Current Polygons window.

Click Run. You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.

4.

Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the name of the polygon. After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.

5. l

Click OK. The combined polygon is displayed in the map window.

Set polygons in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify the properties of polygons in batches

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. 4. Set the font, fill color, and line color of polygons in batches in the Display dialog box.

Show/hide names of polygons in batches

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons. 3. Choose Show/Hide All Polygon's Name from the shortcut menu. TIP You can right-click a polygon in the map window and choose Show Polygon Name from the shortcut menu to show/hide the name of the polygon.

----End

3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data This section describes the interfaces and parameters for managing geographic data. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


50



Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format This section describes the parameters that are involved in the manual and quick import of geographic data in Planet format. You can refer to this section when importing geographic data in Planet format through the Import Map dialog box. Parameter Map File Path: Indicates the path of map files.

Description Clutter

Indicates the file path of clutter-layer data.

Height

Indicates the file path of altitude-layer data.

Vector

Indicates the file path of vector-layer data.

Building

Indicates the file path of clutter-height-layer data.

Projection File Path: Indicates the path of the projection file.

Projection Path

Indicates the path of the projection file.

Projection File Valid

Indicates whether the projection file is valid.

Projection Parameter

Benchmark Longitude

Indicates the central longitudinal line in the projection zone. The default value is 117. The value range is from 0 to 360. The difference between the central longitudinal line in the coordinate system and the longitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.

Benchmark Latitude

Indicates the central latitudinal line in the projection zone. The default value is 0. The value range is from -90 to 90. The difference between the central latitudinal line in the coordinate system and the latitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Offset in Y Direction

Indicates the offset in the Y direction.

Offset in X Direction

Indicates the offset in the X direction.

Projection type

Projection type

Indicates the projection mode.

Spheroid

Spheroid

Selects a type of spheroid.


51



Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps This section describes the parameters for importing satellite maps. You can refer to this section when importing satellite maps in the Import Satellite Map dialog box. Parameter Geographic Information: indicates the settings related to the position of a satellite map in the map window.

Bound Type

Description

Value

Indicates the boundary mode.

If no geographic data is imported, the value can only be X/Y.

l Long/Lat indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are longitude/ latitude coordinates. This option is available only when geographic data is imported. l X/Y indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are geodetic coordinates. West

Indicates the western boundary of a satellite map.

North

Indicates the northern boundary of a satellite map.

East

Indicates the eastern boundary of a satellite map.

South

Indicates the southern boundary of a satellite map.

NOTE l The value of the eastern boundary must be greater than the value of the western boundary; the value of the northern boundary must be greater than the value of the southern boundary. l You can also drag the preview graph in the map window to change the graph position.

Transparency

Indicates the transparency of The default value is 33%. a satellite map.

Source File

Indicates the path of the satellite map file.

-

Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of geographic data. You can refer to this section when setting the properties for displaying the Clutter layer, Heights layer, Buildings layer, Vector layer, and geographic projection layer.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


52



Parameters in the Clutter Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Value

Color

Indicates the color of a clutter.

The system maps the default color of each clutter based on the keyword. If the mapping fails, the clutter color is blue by default. You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme.

Value

Indicates the name of a clutter.

The value depends on the geographic data.

Legend

Indicates the name of a clutter in the legend.


Add To Legend

Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter class to the legend.

This option is not selected by default.

Transparency

Indicates the transparency of a layer.

The default value is 40%.

Parameter in the Building Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Value

Color

Indicates the color of a height range.

By default, the system supports 11 height ranges. One height range corresponds to one color. The number of height ranges can be any number from 2 to 225. You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Min Value

Indicates the minimum value of a height range.

The unit is meter.

Max Value

Indicates the maximum value of a height range.

The unit is meter.

Legend

Indicates the name of a height range in the legend.

The name of a height range consists of its maximum value and minimum value.

Add To Legend

Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the altitude to the legend.



53



Parameter

Description

Value

Transparency



Parameter

Description

Value

Color

Indicates the color of a height range.

By default, the system supports 14 height ranges. One height range corresponds to one color.

Parameter in the Height Dialog Box

You can click Color of each clutter to change the coloring scheme. Min Value

Indicates the minimum value of a height range.

The unit is meter.

Max Value

Indicates the maximum value of a height range.

The unit is meter.

Legend

Indicates the name of a height range in the legend.

The name of a height range consists of its maximum value and minimum value.

Add To Legend

Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter height to the legend.


Transparency



Contrast

Indicates the threedimensional display contrast.

The default value is 7. NOTE l If the slider is moved to 10, it indicates the maximum contrast effect. l If the slider is moved to 1, it indicates there is no three-dimensional effect.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


54



Parameters in the Vectors Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Value

Color

Indicates the line pattern and color of each vector (such as the street and railway) in display.

The system maps the default color of each clutter based on the keyword. If the mapping fails, the clutter color is orange by default. You can click Color of each vector to change the coloring scheme.

Legend

Indicates the name of a vector in the legend.


Add To Legend

Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the vector layer to the legend.


Parameter

Description

Value

Symbol

Indicates the pattern, color, and size of a point layer.

You can click Symbol of each point layer to change the coloring scheme.

Legend

Indicates the name of a point layer in the legend.


Add To Legend

Indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the point layer to the legend.


Parameters in the Text Dialog Box

Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer This section describes the parameters for setting the clutter class layer. You can refer to this section when setting the clutter class layer parameters in the Clutter Parameters Display dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Value

Code

Indicates the number of a clutter class.


Clutter Class

Indicates the name of a clutter class.


Clutter Height

Indicates the height of a clutter.

The default value is 0 and the unit is meter.


55



Parameter

Description

Value

Spatial Multiplex Factor

Indicates the spatial multiplexing factor.

The default value is 1.

Penetration Loss

Indicates the penetration loss.

The default value is 0 and the unit is dB. The penetration loss varies according to the propagation environment.

Model Standard Deviation

Indicates the standard deviation of the slow fading margin.

The default value is 7 and the unit is dB. The standard deviation varies according to the propagation environment.

Shadow Corr

C/(I+N)Standard Deviation

Indicates the factor of shadow fading.

The default value is 0.5.

Indicates the standard deviation based on C/(I + N).

The default value is 8 and the unit is dB.

The factor varies according to the propagation environment.

Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems This section describes the parameters for setting the projection mode and spheroid data. You can refer to this section when setting the projection mode and spheroid data in the Coordinate Systems dialog box.

Parameters in the Coordinate Systems dialog box Parameter

Description

Value

Find in

Selects a coordinate system group from the drop-down list.

The default value is favorite.

New Group

Creates a coordinate system group.

The name of a coordinate system group contains a maximum of 248 characters including only numerals, letters, and underscores.

Click this button. The New Group dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the new coordinate system group.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


56



Parameter

Description

Value

Delete Group

Deletes a coordinate system group.

You can delete custom coordinate system groups but cannot delete predefined coordinate system groups. That is, deleting favorite coordinate system groups is not allowed.

Name

Indicates the name of an existing coordinate system.

-

Projection

Indicates the projection mode of a coordinate system.

-

Spheroid

Indicates the spheroid data of a coordinate system.

-

Region

Indicates a region.

The value is determined by the projection mode and spheroid data. You do not need to set this parameter.

Creates a coordinate system.

For details about the parameters, see Parameters in the Create dialog box.

List of existing coordinate systems in the selected group

New

Click this button. The Create dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the new coordinate system. Then, set the project mode and spheroid data. Property

Checks the properties of the selected coordinate system.

-

Delete

Deletes the selected coordinate system.

-

Parameters in the Create dialog box Parameter General

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Name

Description

Value

Indicates the name of a coordinate system.

The default value is NewSystem.


57



Parameter Projection Parameter

Benchmark Longitude

NOTE The projection parameters vary according to the projection mode.

Description

Value

Indicates the central longitudinal line in the projection zone.

The default value is 117. The value range is from 0 to 360. NOTE The difference between the central longitudinal line in the coordinate system and the longitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.

Benchmark Latitude

Indicates the central latitudinal line in the projection zone.

The default value is 0. The value range is from -90 to 90. NOTE The difference between the central latitudinal line in the coordinate system and the latitude of each site must be less than 6 degrees.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Offset in Y Direction

Indicates the offset in the Y direction.

The default value is 0 and the unit is meter. The value range is from 0 to 1,000,000.

Offset in X Direction

Indicates the offset in the X direction.

The default value is 500,000 and the unit is meter. The value range is from 0 to 600,000.

First Parallel

Indicates the first standard latitudinal line.


Second Parallel

Indicates the second standard latitudinal line.


AzCentralLin e

Indicates the azimuth of the central line in the projection.


RectifiedToS kew

Indicates the rectified angle of the oblique angle.


Longitude Zone

Indicates the longitudinal zone.

The default value is 0 and the value range is from 0 to 60.

Projection type

Projection type

Indicates the projection mode.

-

Spheroid

Spheroid

Selects a type of spheroid.

-


58



Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of lines. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of lines in the Line Properties dialog box. Table 3-5 Parameters on the Line Properties Tab Page Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a line. The default value is Line_*.

Show Line Name

Indicates whether to show the name of a line in the map window. By default, this option is selected.

Length(m)

Indicates the length of a line. Unit: m.

Line Width(px)

Indicates the width of a line. The default value is 2. The unit is pixel.

Line Type

Indicates the type of a line.

Line Color

Indicates the color of a line.

Comments

Indicates the comments on the line.

Table 3-6 Parameters on the Points List Tab Page Parameter

Description

Point Type

Indicates the display mode of the coordinates at the points of a line. The default value is X/ Y. l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates. l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as longitude/latitude coordinates. NOTE If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/ Latitude is unavailable.

X

Indicates the X coordinate of a point.

Y

Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.

Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Polygons This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of polygons or viewing the clutter information about polygons. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


59



of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information about polygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.

Parameters in the Polygon Properties Dialog Box Table 3-7 Parameters displayed on the Region Properties tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a polygon. The default value is Polygon_Draw_*.

Show Polygon Information

Indicates whether to show the name of a polygon in the map window. By default, this option is selected.

Area

Indicates the area of a polygon. The unit is square kilometer.

Comments

Indicates the comments on a polygon.

Table 3-8 Parameters displayed on the Points List tab page Parameter

Description

Point Type

Indicates the display mode of the coordinates at the points of a polygon. The default value is X/Y. l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates. l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as longitude/latitude coordinates. NOTE If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/ Latitude is unavailable.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Polygon Order

Indicates the number of a polygon. The default value is 1. This parameter is set to 1 for simple polygons by default.

X

Indicates the X coordinate of a point.

Y

Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.

Longitude

Indicates the longitude of a point.

Latitude

Indicates the latitude of a point.


60



Table 3-9 Parameters displayed on the Font tab page Parameter

Description

Color

Color.

Font

Font.

Size

Size.

Style

Style.

Example

Example of words.

Table 3-10 Parameters displayed on the Color&Line tab page Parameter

Description

Color

Color for filling.

Transparency

Transparence.

Lines Color

Indicates the color of lines in a polygon. The default color is blue.

Lines Type

Indicates the display mode of lines in a polygon. The default value is solid.

Line Width

Indicates the display width of lines in a polygon. The default value is 2 and the unit is pixel.

Parameters in the Clutter Statistics of XXX Dialog Box

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Value

ID

Indicates the ID of a clutter class on the U-Net.


Clutter Class



Area(sq.km.)

Indicates the size of a clutter in the polygon.

The value depends on the size of the polygon and the geographic data. The unit is square kilometer.


61



Parameter

Description

Value

Percent

Indicates the percentage of a clutter in the polygon.

The value depends on the size of the polygon and the geographic data. The unit is %.

3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.

3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models Every propagation model provided by the U-Net is applicable to a certain situation, frequency, and radio technology. Table 3-11 describes the bands, required geographic data, factors, configuration requirements, and application scenarios of propagation models.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


62



Table 3-11 Characteristics of propagation models Propagatio n Model

Band

Cost-Hata 1500 MHz to model 2000 MHz (including the Cost-Hata HW model)

Factor

Configuration Requirement

Recommended Application Scenario

l Terrain condition.

l Whether to calculate the diffraction.

1 km < Cell radius < 20 km

l Clutter statistics. l A formula corresponds to a clutter.

l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss in municipal areas.

Applicable to the GSM1800, UMTS, and LTE technologies. Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings. Usually used for prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


63



Propagatio n Model

Band

Okumura 150 MHz to Hata model 2000 MHz (including the Okumura Hata HW model)

Factor



l Terrain condition.

l Whether to calculate the diffraction.

1 km < Cell radius < 20 km

l Clutter statistics. l A formula corresponds to a clutter.

l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss in municipal areas.

Applicable to the GSM900, CDMA 2000, and LTE technologies. Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings. Usually used for prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.

SPM model 150 MHz to (including the 2000 MHz SPM900 and SPM2G models)

l Terrain condition. l Clutter statistics. l Effective antenna height. There are six methods of calculating the effective antenna height.

l The diffraction weight is differentiated in the case of LOS or NLOS. l Limited by the free space loss. l Loss and weight of each type of clutter l Clearance area of the receiver

0.5 km < Cell radius < 20 km Applicable to the GSM900, GSM1800, UMTS, CDMA 2000, WiMAX, and LTE technologies. Compared with the Hata models, the SPM models are widely applicable to the scenarios of macro cells. Widely used for capacity simulation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


64



Propagatio n Model

Band

Factor



ITURP model (that is, 1238 model)

1800 MHz to 2000 MHz

l Distance (LOS and NLOS) and frequency

l Propagation scenarios are classified into LOS and NLOS scenarios.

Indoor scenarios.

l Margin of slow fading l NLOS considers the loss in penetration through floors in different environments . The loss depends on the number of penetrated floors. l NLOS considers the distance loss coefficient N.

COST231WIM

800 MHz to 2000 MHz

l Terrain condition. l Clutter statistics.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Used for only prediction.

l The margin of slow fading depends on the requirement on the coverage probability and the standard deviation of indoor slow fading. l In the cases of residential buildings, office buildings, and malls, N is 28, 30, and 22, respectively. Three parts are Urban areas with involved: free a lot of high space propagation buildings. loss, rooftop-tostreet diffraction and scattering loss, and multishielding loss. Configure parameters for each part.


65



Propagatio n Model

Band

Factor



KeenanMotley

Around 2000 MHz

l Distance and frequency.

-

Indoor scenarios.

l Loss in penetration through walls.

Used for only prediction.

l Number of walls. l The impact of multipath propagation is not considered. The penetration loss of each wall is the same. Volcano Urban

Volcano Rural Volcano Indoor

2G, 3G, and 4G frequency bands

NOTE l The Volcano model is a third-party model. To install this model, you need to purchase the corresponding software. Volcano 3.1.2 or later needs to be installed for U-Net 3.8 or a later version. l After the Volcano model is installed, you need to run the U-Net again. The U-Net automatically detects the installed Volcano model and loads the Volcano model.

Densely populated urban areas with many buildings. Suburbs and rural areas. Indoor scenarios.

l For details about the Volcano model and how to install the Volcano model, see the user guide of the Volcano model software.

3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models By default, the U-Net provides multiple common propagation models. You can directly modify the properties of a propagation model or duplicate a propagation model and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.

Context Propagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configured in the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example to describe how to configure a propagation model. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


66



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default). Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 Properties

NOTE

If you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.

Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model. 1.

On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.

2.

On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model and set the formula.

3.

Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized mode by exporting and importing the parameters. 1.

Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.

2.

Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to the propagation model as an .xls file.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


67



3.

Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.

4.

Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.

5.

Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to the propagation model. If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successful and updates the parameters based on the imported file. If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, such as the heading, is correct and complete.

----End


To delete a propagation model, choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

l

After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models. NOTE

If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on the Setting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect for the Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.

3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models This section describes how to assign propagation models. You need to select a proper propagation model for each cell based on the technical and engineering conditions. You can assign the same propagation model to all cells or assign different propagation models to each cells.

Prerequisites l

Propagation models are available in the project.

l

Cells exist in the project.

Context To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagation models to each cell: l

Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radius

l

Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius

If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculates the main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data. In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagation model, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model are defined.

Procedure l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Assign a propagation model to a group of cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68



In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the same propagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model to the cell group. 1.

In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.

2.

In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.

3.

Right-click the cell group and choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu. The table of the selected cell group is displayed. The property values of all the cells in the cell group are displayed in the table.

4.

Modify the values in each column (such as the Main Propagation Model column) to ensure that parameter values of all the cells are the same. TIP

You can set the parameters in the first row. Then, press Ctrl+D so that the parameter values in the following rows are the same as those in the first row. In this way, parameter values of all the cells are the same.

l

Assign a propagation model to a single cell. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.

3.


4.

Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. For example, for the LTE-FDD network, click the LTE-FDDCell tab.

5.

Click

6.

Set propagation model parameters in the displayed Propagation dialog box. For details, see Parameters on the Propagation Tab Page in the Repeater Properties Dialog Box.

following Propagation Model.

For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pages corresponding to each RAT. ----End

3.4.4 Setting Bands Before performing frequency planning, you must set bands. The U-Net provides multiple predefined bands. You can modify the properties of the predefined bands. When the predefined bands cannot meet your requirements, you can define bands.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu. NOTE

If the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.

Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting Bands. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


69



You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in the Bandwidth Configuration dialog box. ----End


Assign the band to a cell. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. Click GSMTRX for a GSM network and LTE-FDDCell for an LTE-FDD network.

5. l

Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.

You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.

3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models This section describes the interfaces and parameters involved in the management of propagation models.

Parameters for Setting Bands This section describes the parameters involved in band settings. You can refer to this section when setting bands in the Frequency Bands dialog box. Table 3-12 Parameters in the LTE-FDD/LTE-TDD/CDMA network Parameter

Description

Value

Name

Indicates the name of a band.

-

Bandwidth(MHz)

Indicates the bandwidth.

l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks: 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20. l CDMA network: 1.25.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Start Channel Index

Indicates the start index of the available frequencies corresponding to a band.

End Channel Index

Indicates the end index of the available frequencies corresponding to a band.


l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks: from 0 to 128. l CDMA network: from 0 to 2 The value of Start Channel Index must be less than or equal to the value of End Channel Index.

70



Parameter

Description

Value

Excluded Channels

Indicates the index of an excluded channel.

The default value is null. Multiple values can be entered. Use commas to separate the values.

ACIR

Indicates the adjacent channel signal-tointerference ratio.

The default value is 30 and the unit is dB.

Band Number

Indicates the number of a band.

The value range is from 1 to 40.

Frequency(DL)(MHz)

Indicates the downlink frequency.

A parameter for LTE-FDD/ CDMA.

Frequency(UL)(MHz)

Indicates the uplink frequency.

A parameter for LTE-FDD/ CDMA.

Frequency(MHz)

Indicates the uplink or downlink frequency.

A parameter for LTE-TDD

Actual Bandwidth(MHz)

Indicates the actual bandwidth.

A parameter for LTE-FDD

Useable RB Num

Indicates the number of RBs available for use.

A parameter for LTE-FDD

The value range is from 0 to 231.

Table 3-13 Parameters in the GSM network Parameter

Description

Value

Name

Frequency band name.

-

ARFCN

Absolute radio frequency channel number

For example, 512-885 indicates that the range is [512,885]. 975-1023;0-124 indicates that the range is [975,1023];[0,124].

Frequency(UL)(MHz)

Uplink start frequency.

Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(UL)s. For example, if ARFCN is set to 975-1023;0-124, you need to set Frequency(UL) (MHz) to 880.2;890.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


71



Parameter

Description

Value

Frequency(DL)(MHz)

Downlink start frequency.

Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(DL)s. For example, if ARFCN is set to 975-1023;0-124, you need to set Frequency(DL) (MHz) to 925.2;935.

Adjacent channel interference ratio.

ACIR

Unit: dB. Value range: real number that is greater than 0.

Table 3-14 Parameters in the UMTS network Parameter

Description

Value

Name


-

UARFCN(UL)

Uplink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.

For example, 9612-9888 indicates that the range is [9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12 indicates that the range is [9262,9538];[12,12].

UARFCN(DL)

Downlink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.


Frequency(UL)(MHz)


Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(UL)s.

Frequency(DL)(MHz)


Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(DL)s.

ACIR

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)




72



Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model Parameter Diffraction Calculate: Sets the parameters for calculating the diffraction.

Diffraction Loss Method

Description

Value

Indicates whether to consider diffraction during path loss calculation.

Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein

Effect Tx Height Calculate Method

Indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.

Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver

General: Sets the parameters for common calculation.

Limitation to free space loss

Formula

Indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space.

The default value is True.

For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.

For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in Typical Scenarios.

Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l

Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)

l

Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


73



l

Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16

Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter

Description

Lu

Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)

a(Hm)

Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6×lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8× x lg(f) - K9)

Cm

Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.

f

Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to 2,000 MHz.

Hb

Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is from 30 m to 200 m.

d

Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer.

Hm

Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1 m to 10 m.

Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in Typical Scenarios

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Sc en ar io

K 1

K 2

K 3

K 4

K 5

K 6

K 7

K 8

K 9

K 10

K 11

K 12

K 13

K 14

K 15

K 16

De ns e ur ba n

49 .3

33 .9

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 11

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

3

0

0

5. 4

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

Ur ba n/ Su bu rb

46 .3

33 .9

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 11

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

0

0

0

5. 4

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94


74



Sc en ar io

K 1

K 2

K 3

K 4

K 5

K 6

K 7

K 8

K 9

K 10

K 11

K 12

K 13

K 14

K 15

K 16

Ru ral

46 .3

33 .9

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 11

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

0

18 . 33

35 . 94

5. 4

4. 78

18 . 33

35 . 94

Hi gh wa y/ Hi gh sp ee d rai lw ay

46 .3

33 .9

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 11

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

0

18 . 33

40 . 94

5. 4

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model Parameter Diffractio n Calculate : parameter s for diffractio n calculatio n

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Description

Value




75



Parameter Effect Tx Height Calculate Method

Description

Value



General: common calculatio n parameter s


Formula



For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model.

For the parameter values, see Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios.

Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l


l


l



Description

Lu

Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)

a(Hm)

Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a function of the size of the coverage area. l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12 l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)

Cm

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in K1, and thus is not presented in this formula. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76



Parameter

Description

f

Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to 2000 MHz.

Hb


d


Hm


Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scen ario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10~ K16

Dens e urban

49.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Urba n

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Subur b

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Rural

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

High way

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Highspeed railw ay

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Parameters for Setting the SPM2G Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the SPM2G propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the SPM2G propagation model.

Parameters Related to the SPM2G Propagation Model

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Value

Diffra ction Calcul

Indicates whether to consider building height.

The default value is False.

Add building height


77



Parameter

Description

Value

ate: parame ters for diffract ion calcula tion

Indicates the algorithm for calculating the clutter loss.

Available algorithms are as follows:

Clutter Loss Calculate Method

l None l Uniform l Triangular l Logarithmic l Exponential Diffraction Loss Method






Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Receiver on top clutter

Indicates whether the receiver is on the top of the clutter.


Gener al: comm on calcula tion parame ters




Param eters: calcula tion parame ters

K1 - K7

For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model.



78



Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter) Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Parameter

Description

K1

Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the frequency.

K2

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the distance.

d

Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.

K3

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the transmitter antenna.

HTxeff

Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is meter.

K4

Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this parameter indicates the diffraction status.

DiffractionLoss

Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit is dB.

K5

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).

K6

Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the receiver antenna.

HRxeff

Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.

K7

Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.

f(clutter)

Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.

Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Scenari o

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

Dense urban

27.425

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1

Urban

23.455

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1


79



Scenari o

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

Suburb

11.955

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1

Rural

3.065

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1

Highway

-3.455

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1

Highspeed railway

-3.455

44.9

5.83

1

-6.55

0

1

Parameters for Setting the SPM900 Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the SPM900 propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the SPM900 propagation model.

Parameters Related to the SPM900 Propagation Model Parameter Diffracti on Calculat e: paramete rs for diffracti on calculati on

Description

Value

Add building height

Indicates whether to consider building height.


Clutter Loss Calculate Method

Indicates the algorithm for calculating the clutter loss.

Available algorithms are as follows: l None l Uniform l Triangular l Logarithmic l Exponential




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


80



Parameter Effect Tx Height Calculate Method

Description

Value



Receiver on top clutter

Indicates whether the receiver is on the top of the clutter.


General : common calculati on paramete rs




Paramet ers: calculati on paramete rs

K1~K7

For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the SPM900 Propagation Model.


Formula of the SPM900 Propagation Model Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter) Parameters in the formula are described as follows:

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

K1

Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the frequency.

K2

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the distance.

d

Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.


81



Parameter

Description

K3

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the transmitter antenna.

HTxeff

Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is meter.

K4

Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this parameter indicates the diffraction status.

DiffractionLoss

Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit is dB.

K5

Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).

K6

Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes with the height of the receiver antenna.

HRxeff

Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.

K7

Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.

f(clutter)

Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.

Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scenari o

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

Dense urban

12.13

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Urban

12.12

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Suburb

2.17

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Rural

-11.39

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Highway

-16.39

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Highspeed railway

-16.39

44.9

5.83

1

0

0

1

Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata propagation model. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


82



Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata Propagation Model Parameter

Description

Value

Diffra ction Calcul ate: param eters for diffrac tion calcula tion




l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein The default value is None.



Available algorithms are as follows: l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver The default value is None.

Gener al: comm on calcula tion param eters


Formula



For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model.


Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l


l


l


Parameters in the formula are described as follows: Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


83



Parameter

Description

Lu

Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)

a(Hm)


Cm


f


Hb


d


Hm


Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Sc en ar io

K 1

K 2

K 3

K 4

K 5

K 6

K 7

K 8

K 9

K 10

K 11

K 12

K 13

K 14

K 15

K 16

Hi gh sp ee d rai lw ay

64 . 77

26 . 16

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 1

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

-4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

0

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

De ns e ur ba n

69 . 55

26 . 16

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 1

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

0

3. 2

11 . 75

4. 97

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94


84



Sc en ar io

K 1

K 2

K 3

K 4

K 5

K 6

K 7

K 8

K 9

K 10

K 11

K 12

K 13

K 14

K 15

K 16

Ur ba n

69 . 55

26 . 16

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 1

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

0

0

0

0

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

Su bu rb

67 . 55

26 . 16

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 1

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

-2

5. 4

0

0

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

Ru ral

64 . 77

26 . 16

13 . 82

44 .9

6. 55

1. 1

0. 7

1. 56

0. 8

-4. 78

18 . 33

35 . 94

0

4. 78

18 . 33

40 . 94

Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata HW propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata HW propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model Parameter

Description

Value

Diff ract ion Cal cula te: para met ers for diffr acti on calc ulati on




l None l Atlas l Bullington l Deygout l Epstein The default value is None.




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


85



Parameter

Description

Value

Gen eral : com mon calc ulati on para met ers



For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model.



Formula

Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l


l


l



Description

Lu

Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)

a(Hm)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Cm


f


Hb


d

Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile station. The unit is kilometer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86



Parameter

Description

Hm


Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scen ario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10~ K16

Dens e urban

72.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Urba n

69.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Subur b

61.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Rural

54.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

High way

54.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Highspeed railw ay

54.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0

Parameters for Setting the ITURP Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the ITURP propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the ITURP propagation model.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


87



Parameters Related to the ITURP Propagation Model Parameter

Description

Value

Diffrac tion Calcul ate: parame ters for diffract ion calculat ion




l AbsSpot l Height above the ground l Height above the average ground l Spot Hr l Slope At Receiver l Enhanced Slope at receiver

Gener al: commo n calculat ion parame ters


Formula



For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the ITURP Propagation Model.


Formula of the ITURP Propagation Model Formula: Total = K2 + K1 x lg(f) + N x lg(d x 1000) + Lf Parameters in the formula are described as follows:

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

K2

Indicates an empirical coefficient. It is a constant.

K1

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(f). It is a constant.

f

Indicates the frequency range.

N

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(d x 1000). It is a constant.

d


Lf

Indicates the logarithm of the frequency range. The value varies according to the scenario.


88



Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scenari o

Lf

K2

K1

N

K4

K5

K6

NLOS house

K4 + K5 x K6

-28

20

28

0

4

2

NLOS office

K4 + K5 x (K6-1)

-28

20

30

15

4

2

NLOS store

K4 + K5 x (K6-1)

-28

20

22

6

3

2

LOS

0

-28

20

20

0

0

0

Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model Parameter Diffraction Calculate: Sets the parameters for calculating the diffraction.


Description

Value



Parameters: Sets the parameters for common calculation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Angel between incident-wave and road

Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.


Building height

Indicates the average height of surrounding buildings.



Unit: degree.

Unit: m.

89



Parameter Distance between buildings

Road Width

Description

Value

Indicates the distance between buildings.


Indicates the road width.


Unit: m.

Unit: m.

Formula of the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model The formula is as follows: l

In the Los scenario: Total = K1 + K2 * lg(d) + K3

l

In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd <=0: Total = PL0

l

In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd >0: Total = PL0 + PLrts + PLmsd


Description

PL0

Indicates the free space propagation loss. Unit: dB. PL0 =NK1 + NK2*lg(d) + NK3*lg(f)

PLrts

Indicates the rooftop-to-street diffraction and scattering loss. PLrts = NK4 –NK5*lg(w) +NK6*lg(f) + NK7*lg(Hroof -Hue) +Lcri

PLmsd

Indicates the multi-shielding loss. PLmsd =Lbsk+ Ka + Kd*lg(d) + Kf*lg(f) - NK6*lg(b)

Lcri

Indicates the directional loss. l -10<= φ < 35 deg: Lcri = NKL1 + NKL2*φ l 35 <= φ <55deg: Lcri = NKL3 + NKL4(φ-35) l 55<= φ <90deg: Lcri = NKL4 – NKL5(φ-55)

Lbsk

l Hbs>Hroof: Lbsk = NKL5*lg(1+Hbs -Hroof) l Hbs<=Hroof: Lbsk = 0

Ka

l Hbs>Hroof: Ka = NKL6 l Hbs<=Hroof And d>=0.5 km: Ka = NKL7 – NKL8*(Hbs Hroof) l Hbs<=Hroof And d<0.5 km: Ka = NKL9-NKL10*(Hbs Hroof)*(d/0.5)

Kd

l Hbs>Hroof: Kd = NKL11 l Hbs<=Hroof: Kd = NKL12 – NKL13*((Hbs -Hroof)/Hroof)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


90



Parameter

Description

Kf

Kf = NKL14 + NKL15 * (f/925 -1)

f

Indicates the carrier frequency. Unit: MHz.

d

Indicates the distance between the base station and a terminal's antenna. Unit: km.

w

Indicates the road width. Unit: m.

Hroof

Indicates the height of surrounding buildings. Unit: m.

Hbs

Indicates the height of the base station antenna. Unit: m.

Hue

Indicates the height of the mobile station antenna.

φ

Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave. Unit: degree.

K1

Indicates a constant item.

K2

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(d). It is a constant.

K3

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(f). It is a constant.

Default Parameter Values of the Cost Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model Para mete r

K1

K2

K3

NK1

NK2

NK3

NK4

NK5

NK6

NK7

Defa ult Valu e

42.6

26

20

32.4

20

20

-16.9

10

10

20

Parameters for Setting the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Keenan-Motley propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Keenan-Motley propagation model.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


91



Parameters Related to the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model Parameter Diffraction Calculate: parameters for diffraction calculation


Description

Value



General: common calculation parameters




Parameters : calculation parameters

K1-K5

For the description of parameters in the formula, see Formula of the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model.


Formula of the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model Formula: Total = K1 + K2 x lg(f) + K3 x lg(d) + K4 x K5 Parameters in the formula are described as follows:

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

K1


d


f

Indicates the frequency range.

K2

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(f). It is a constant.

K3

Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(d). It is a constant.

K4


K5



92



Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios Scenario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

KeenanMotley

32.5

20

20

20

2

Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model This section describes the parameters related to the Clutter Related Hata propagation model. You can refer to this section when setting the Clutter Related Hata propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model Parameter

Description

Clutter

Clutter.

Propagation Model

Indicates the Hata propagation model related to the clutter.

Loss

Path loss.

3.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.

3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data This section describes how to import antenna data as .txt and .msi files.

Context l

The U-Net allows you to import and export antenna data, including 2D and 3D data, as .txt and .msi files.

l

Before importing antenna files, you can manually set the value of each parameter in the antenna files. If a value in the antenna file is not within the specified value range, the antenna file may fail to be imported.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Antennas. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu., as shown in Figure 3-14. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


93



Figure 3-14 Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported.. l If data of a single antenna is imported, select the .txt or .msi file corresponding to the antenna. l If data of multiple antennas is imported, select .txt or .msi files in batches. l If an imported antenna name is the same as the name of an existing antenna, the U-Net adds a number to the imported antenna name to distinguish the two antennas. Step 5 Click Open. The Import Antenna File dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15. Figure 3-15 Import Antenna File

l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower part indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported. l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


94



Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, configure antenna parameters. For details about the parameters, see Table 3-15. Table 3-15 Parameters for importing antenna files Parameter

Description

File Name

File name used for identifying the user antenna attribute name in the antenna file.

Field Separator

Field separator used by a file. A .txt file uses the Tab separator, and an .msi file uses the space separator.

Source

User antenna attribute name parsed based on FileName. Indicates the parsing reference. l Use the separator specified by the file format to parse file fields. l If the current row has only one piece of data, the data is the antenna attribute name. The next row is the field information. NOTE This rule is executed from the first row of the file.

l If the current row has several pieces of data (separated by separators), the first piece of data is the attribute name. l Data rows ranging from 0 to 359 have no field name. NOTE The purpose is to avoid the angle information displayed after fields such as Horizontal or Vertical.

l If the user antenna data does not comply with the preceding rules, you will be prompted that the user antenna attribute name cannot be identified. NOTE When antenna data files are imported in batches, user antenna and U-Net antenna attribute names in other antenna data files are mapped based on the attribute name mapping in the Import Antenna Filedialog box.

Destination

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Standard antenna field name used by the UNet. You can switch cell values in the dropdown list to configure the mapping between user antenna attribute names and U-Net antenna attribute names. indicates that the corresponding field information is ignored. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95



Step 7 After the configuration, click Import to import the antenna file to the project. NOTE

l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower part indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported. l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.

----End


l

l

You can export data of a single antenna. 1.

In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

2.

In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an antenna.

3.


4.

In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name.. Then, export the antenna data.

You can export the antenna data in batches. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.

3.

Right-click antennas and choose Export > Export File Type from the shortcut menu. Then, export antenna data to files in batches.

You can view antennas in the window. 1.


2.

Choose Antennas > an antenna from the navigation tree.

3.

Right-click an antenna and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Properties dialog box is displayed.

4.

View the antennas in the window on the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages.

If you have imported 3D data of an antenna, you can drag the slider in the lower left corner of the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages to change the value of Attenuation, as shown in Figure 3-16.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


96



Figure 3-16 scroll bar

3.5.2 Setting Antennas Each U-Net project contains multiple defined antennas of specific technologies. You can create an antenna either directly or copy an existing antenna file and modify the related parameters to create an antenna.

Procedure l

Create an antenna 1.

Select a method for creating an antenna. If...

Then...

Create an antenna directly

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas. 3. Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Properties dialog box is displayed.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


97



If...

Then...

Copy an existing antenna file to create an antenna

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an antenna. 3. Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu. 4. Select the copied antenna. 5. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

l

2.

In the antenna property dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box.

3.

Click OK.

Create an antenna group. When an antenna group supports multiple carriers, the U-Net can automatically match the antenna gains with different bands to perform calculations. The antenna group supports smart antenna. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Antennas Groups.

3.

Choose Add Group from the shortcut menu. The New Antenna Group dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set the property parameters of the antenna group. For parameter description, see Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box.

----End


l

Modifying antenna properties 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.

3.

Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Table dialog box is displayed.

4.

Double-click the target cell, and then modify the antenna properties in the displayed dialog box.

Allocating antennas to cells You can perform this operation after creating or importing cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

1.


2.


3.


4.

On the Antenna Config tab page, select an antenna type from the Antenna dropdown list.

5.

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98



3.5.3 Setting a TMA Tower mounted amplifiers (TMAs) are used to reduce the overall noise figure of base stations. You can assign configured TMAs to cells for calculating the total loss.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > TMA Equipment from the shortcut menu. The TMA Equipment dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a TMA. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-16. NOTE

l After you set the TMA parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for setting other TMAs. l You can modify the original TMA parameter settings by referring to Table 3-16.

Table 3-16 TMA parameters Parameter

Meaning

Name

Indicates the name of a TMA.

NoiseFigure(dB)

Indicates the noise figure. The unit is dB.

Gain(UL)(dB)

Indicates the uplink gain. The unit is dB.

Loss(DL)(dB)

Indicates the downlink loss. The unit is dB.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can assign the TMAs to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the configured TMA, by default, the system does not consider the TMA during the calculation of total loss. 1.


2.


3.


4.

next to On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5.

Clear Input Total Loss.

6.

Select a TMA in TMA.

7.

Click OK.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


99



3.5.4 Setting Feeders Feeders are used to connect TMAs to base stations (eNodeBs, BTSs, or NodeBs). You can assign configured feeders to cells for calculating the total loss.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Feeders dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a feeder. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-17. NOTE

l After you set the feeder parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for setting other feeders. l You can modify the original feeder parameter settings by referring to Table 3-17.

Table 3-17 Feeder parameters Parameter

Meaning

Name

Indicates the name of a feeder.

dB/100m

Indicates the loss of every 100 meters.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can assign the feeders to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the configured feeder, by default, the system does not consider the feeder during the calculation of total loss. 1.


2.


3.


4.

On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click next to Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5.

Clear Input Total Loss.

6.

Select a feeder in Feeder.

7.

Set the feeder length of the transmitter and the receiver in Feeder Length(m).

8.

Click OK.

3.5.5 Creating Base Stations You can create base stations and assign the base stations to cells. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


100



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Site Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Site Equipment dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a base station. For details about the parameters, see Table 3-18. NOTE

l After you set the base station parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for setting other sites. l You can modify the original base station parameter settings by referring to Table 3-18.

Table 3-18 Base station parameters Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a base station.

NoiseFigure(dB)

Indicates the noise figure.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can assign the base stations to all cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the configured base station, the system calculates the total loss based on the default base station. 1.


2.


3.


4.

In the Antenna Config area of the displayed Transceiver Properties dialog box, click following the Equipment parameter. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5.

Select a base station from the Site drop-down list.

6.

Click OK.

3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas This section describes the parameters for creating or modifying antennas or antenna groups. You can refer to this section when setting antenna properties in the antenna property setting dialog box or setting antenna group properties in the antenna group property setting dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


101



Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box Table 3-19 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of an antenna, which uniquely identifies the antenna. The U-Net automatically fills in a default name for each new antenna.

Manufacturer

Indicates the vendor of an antenna.

Gain

Indicates the antenna gain. The value range is from 0 to 100 and the unit is dBi.

Pattern Electrical Tilt: (For information only)

Indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna. The value range is from -90 to 90 and the unit is degree.

Comments

Indicates the comments on an antenna. A maximum of 128 bytes are allowed.

Table 3-20 Parameters on the Horizontal Pattern tab page Parameter

Description

Angle(°)

Indicates the horizontal angle of an antenna. The value range is from 0 to 359 and the unit is degree.

Attenuation(dB)

Indicates the attenuation value at the horizontal angle of an antenna. The unit is dB.

Table 3-21 Parameters on the Vertical Pattern tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Angle(°)

Indicates the vertical angle of an antenna. The value range is from 0 to 359 and the unit is degree.

Attenuation(dB)

Indicates the attenuation value at the vertical angle of an antenna. The unit is dB.


102



Table 3-22 Parameters on the Other Properties tab page Parameter

Description

Beamwidth

Indicates the antenna beamwidth. The value range is from 0 to 360 and the unit is degree.

Max Frequency

Indicates the maximum frequency of an antenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is MHz.

Min Frequency

Indicates the minimum frequency of an antenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is MHz. The value of Min Frequency must be smaller than or equal to the value of Max Frequency.

Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box Table 3-23 Parameters in the New Antenna Groupdialog box Parameter

Description

Group Name

Indicates the name of an antenna group.

No.

Indicates the number of an antenna group.

Antenna Name

Indicates the name of an existing antenna, that is, the name of an antenna in the antenna group. After an antenna is selected, a bland row is added automatically for users to add a new antenna.

Minimum Frequency

Indicates the minimum transmit frequency of an antenna. Minimum Frequency must be less than or equal to Maximum Frequency.

Maximum Frequency

Indicates the maximum transmit frequency of an antenna.

Comments

Indicates the comments on the antenna group.

3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


103



3.6.1 Setting MCS Types This section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly the demodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS types do not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.

Context The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes (QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD. Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed. Step 4 Click a blank line marked with * in the table to set an MCS type, as shown in Figure 3-17. For the detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-24. Figure 3-17 MCS

Table 3-24 Parameters for Setting the MCS Parameter

Description

Index

Indicates the index of an MCS.

Highest modulation

Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of the following: l QPSK l 16QAM l 64QAM

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Modulation Order

Indicates a modulation exponent.

Coding Rate

Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104



Parameter

Description

Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)

Indicates the bearer efficiency. Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation exponent

Step 5 Click

to close the table.

----End

3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.

Context For an LTE-FDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. If you need to...

Then...

Create a service type

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-18. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 3-25.

Modify an existing service type

1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD > the existing service type in the navigation tree. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Change parameter values for the existing service type by referring to Table 3-25.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


105



Figure 3-18 New

Table 3-25 Description of service parameters Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a service type.

Type

Service type. l Voice: CS services. l Data: PS services.

GBR

GBR service.

Priority

Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service priority for subscribers in capacity simulation. 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Activity Factor

Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only for CS services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s)

Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s. Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

MAC PDU(kbit)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.


106



Parameter

Description

Max Throughput (kbit/s)

Maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.

Min Throughput (kbit/s)

Minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.

Average Throughput (kbit/s)

Average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput.

Transmission Efficiency

Uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Offset(kbit/s)

Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.

IBLER(%)

Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Body Loss(dB)

Body loss.

Step 3 Click OK. ----End

3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


107



Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If...

Then...

Create a receiver type.

In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new receiver and select type of MCS Table.

Modify an existing receiver type.

Perform Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters for the receiver type by referring to Table 3-26. If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed. Step 6 Click OK. Table 3-26 Parameters for setting LTE-FDD receivers Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a receiver.

MCS Table

Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.

Mobility

Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.

MIMO

Indicates the efficiency of adjusting codes by the receiver.

IBLER(%)

Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to 100.

Channel Relativity

Indicates the channel relativity.

Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set to PDSCH MCS.

MCS Threshold

Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver. You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS bearer information in the Demodulation area. l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required during demodulation. l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the spectrum. l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation thresholds.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


108



3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If you want to... Then... Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD. type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 3-27. Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > existing terminal LTE-FDD > the existing terminal type. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify the parameters of the existing terminal type by referring to Table 3-27

Table 3-27 Parameters for setting terminal types Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a terminal type.

UE Category

Indicates the category of a terminal. The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from 1 to 5.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)

Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.

DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)

Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.

Support UL 64 QAM

Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.

Maximum Layer Number

Indicates the maximum number of layers.

Min Tx Power(dBm)

Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.

Max Tx Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.

Noise Figure(dB)

Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.

Cable Loss(dB)

Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.

UL RS Offset(dB)

Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplink direction.


109



Parameter

Description

RB Number

Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported by the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction.

Reception Equipment

Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.

Gain(dBi)

Indicates the antenna gain.

Number of Transmission Antenna Ports

Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a terminal.

Number of Reception Antenna Ports

Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.

Step 3 ClickOK. ----End

3.6.5 Setting Environment Types This section describes how to set environment types. You can modify the parameters of existing environment types, such as user, mobility type, and user density. If the existing environment types do not meet the requirements, you can create environment types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...

Then...

Create an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments. environment type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new environment type by referring to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29. Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments existing > the existing environment type. environment type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify the parameters of the existing environment type by referring to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


110



If you need to...

Then...

Compare attributes of multiple traffic environments

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments. 2. Right-click and choose Compare Environment Elements from the shortcut menu. The Environment Compare dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-19. NOTE You can select two traffic environments or more to compare in the Select Environments area and select the comparison items in the Environment Items area.

3. Click Compare. In the displayed Environment Compare Result dialog box, check the attributes of the compared traffic environments, as shown in Figure 3-20. 4. Compare attributes of multiple traffic environments by referring to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.

Table 3-28 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of an environment type.

User

Indicates a user type.

Mobility

Indicates a mobility type.

Density(Subscribers/km2)

Indicates the user density (number of users in each square kilometer). The unit is n/km 2, where n indicates the number of users.

Table 3-29 Parameters on the Clutter Weight tab page Parameter

Description

Clutter Class

Indicates the name of a surface feature. The names are relevant to the imported geographical data.

Weight

Indicates the weight occupied by each surface feature. This parameter is used for calculating the number of users allocated to each surface feature. This parameter is available only when Clutter map data exists.

% Indoor

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the proportion of indoor users of a surface feature.


111



Figure 3-19 Environment Compare

Figure 3-20 Environment Compare Result

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


112




3.6.6 Setting User Types You can modify the parameters of existing user types, such as user priority, service type, and user type. If the existing user types do not meet the requirements, you can create user types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required. If you want to... Then... Create a user type

1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click and then choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles from the shortcut menu. 2. Set parameters for the new user type by referring to Table 3-30.

Modify an 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic existing user type Parameters > User Profiles > An existing user type; right-click and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 2. Modify the parameters of the existing user type by referring to Table 3-30. Compare 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles. attributes of user 2. Right-click and choose Compare User Profiles Elements from the types shortcut menu. The User Profiles Compare dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-21. NOTE You can select two user types or more to compare in the Select User Profiles area.

3. Click Compare. In the displayed User Profiles Compare Result dialog box, check the attributes of the compared user types, as shown in Figure 3-22. 4. Compare attributes of user types by referring to Table 3-30.

Table 3-30 Parameters for Setting User Types Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a user.

Priority

Indicates the priority of a user. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority. The larger the number, the higher the priority.

Service Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates a service type. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113



Parameter

Description

Terminal

Indicates a terminal type.

Calls/hour

Indicates the number of calls per hour.

Duration(s)

Indicates the duration of a call.

Volume(DL)(Kbyte)

Indicates the downlink data volume.

Volume(UL)(Kbyte)

Indicates the uplink data volume.

Figure 3-21 User Profiles Compare

Figure 3-22 User Profiles Compare Result

Step 3 Click OK. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


114



3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the requirements, you can create mobility types.

Context The U-Net provides six default mobility types: 30 km/h, 50 km/h, 60 km/h, 90 km/h, Fixed, and Pedestrian.

Procedure Step 1 Create or modify a mobility type. If you want to...

Then...

Create a mobility type

1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click Traffic Parameters > Mobility Types, and then choose New from the shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box is displayed. 2. Set parameters for the new mobility type by referring to Table 3-31. 3. Click OK.

Modify an existing mobility 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic type Parameters > Mobility Types > An existing mobility type; right-click and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box is displayed. 2. Modify the parameters for the existing mobility type by referring to Table 3-31. 3. Click OK.

Table 3-31 Parameters for Setting Mobility Types Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a mobility type.

Average Speed(km/h)

Indicates the mobility speed.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


115



3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.

3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way.

Context l

Not all the base station data files can be imported to the U-Net. The U-Net has certain requirements on the format of the data files (site data, cell data, or transceiver data) to be imported.

l

Generally, you can export base station data and the corresponding configuration file from the U-Net, modify the relevant parameters, and then import the data to the U-Net for analysis.

Procedure Step 1 After exporting base station data and the corresponding configuration file, save or edit the data for future use. 1.


2.

Select the objects to be exported. If...

Then...

Export site data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Site. b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

Export transceiver data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

Export cell data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. b. Choose Cells > Export from the shortcut menu.

3.

In the Data Export dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box. TIP

l You can click Save to save the current parameter configuration in the dialog box as a configuration file. l You can also click Load to load an existing configuration file. The U-Net exports data based on the parameter configuration in the configuration file.

4. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Click Export. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116



5.

Set the file type, saving path, and file name. Then, save the settings. After the data export is complete, you can open the exported file, and view or modify the base station data of the current project.

Step 2 Import the base station data and the corresponding configuration file into the U-Net to automatically create base stations. 1.


2.

Select the objects to be imported. If...

Then...

Import site data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Site. b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu. c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog box.

Import transceiver data.

Import cell data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu. c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog box. a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. b. Choose Cells > Import from the shortcut menu. c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog box.

3.

To ensure that the data is successfully exported, see 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area to check field matching.

4.

Optional: In the Data Import dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.

5.

Click Import. l After the data import is complete, the system creates base stations based on the base station data and displays the base stations in the map window. l If a file fails to be imported, modify the file based on the error information displayed in the system.

----End

3.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Site. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


117



Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set site parameters on the General tab page of the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Creating Sites. Step 5 Click OK. ----End


You can view or modify site properties. In addition, you can move or delete a single site. 1.

Select the site in the map window.

2.

Perform the following operations as required. If...

Then...

You want to view or modify site properties

1. Choose Site Properties from the shortcut menu.

You want to move a site

Directly drag the mouse to move the position of the selected site.

You want to delete a site

Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed dialog box, view or modify site properties such as site name and coordinate values.

The preceding operations can be performed in both the Explorer window and the map window. This section describes the operations performed in only the map window. l

You can also rank or group sites, audit the distance between two sites, and set the display effect of a site. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Site.

3.


Then...

You want to group sites

Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu.

You want to rank sites

Choose Order from the shortcut menu.

You want to audit the distance between two sites

1. Right-click and choose Distance Audit from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed dialog box, set Distance(m)<=, which specifies the audit distance. 3. Click Audit. The names of sites whose distances are within the distance specified by the preset value and their actual distances are displayed in the main window of the UNet.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


118



If...

Then...

You want to set the display effect of a base station

1. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as the display field and color. 3. Click OK.

You want to enable the display or hiding of property columns of basic site parameters

1. Right-click and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Sites table is displayed. 2. Right-click a point in the Sites table and choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parameters in the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to be displayed or hidden in the Sites table. For details, see Basic Parameters of a Site. 4. Close the Columns to be displayed dialog box. The Sites table is updated and displays property columns based on the preceding settings.

3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l

View base station templates. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

On the toolbar, select Template Management from the dropdown list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-23.


119



Figure 3-23 Station Template Properties

The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list. For example, 2. l

.

The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.

Create a base station template. 1.

Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then, a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.

l

2.

Set the properties in the LTE-FDD base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.

3.

Click OK.

View and modify properties of the base station template. 1.

Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.

2.

Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

3.

View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


120



Follow-up Procedure You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base station template. When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it. You cannot delete the last base station template.

3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.

Prerequisites The required base station template is created.

Procedure l

l

Create a single site in batches. 1.

On the toolbar, select a base station template from the down list.

2.

Click

3.

Move the mouse pointer to the target position in the map window.

4.

Click the target position. A base station is created.

drop-

on the toolbar.

Create sites in batches. 1.

On the toolbar, select a base station template from the down list.

2.

Click

drop-

on the toolbar.

(a hexagon-shaped icon), you can create a batch of base stations by By clicking using the same base station template. 3.

Draw the area where the base stations are to be placed. The U-Net places a batch of base stations in the area. In the meantime, sites and cells of the base stations are created.

----End


View and modify site properties. You can right-click a site in the Explorer window or in the map window and then choose the corresponding menu item to view and modify site properties.

l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Move the site. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121



When modifying site properties, you can change the position of the site by changing coordinates. Alternatively, you can drag the site to a new position in the map window. l

Delete the site. You can right-click the site in the explorer window or in the map window and then choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select the site in the map window and then press the Delete key.

l

Export, search for, and group the site, set display properties of the base station.

3.7.5 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.

Prerequisites Base stations (including sites and cells) are available.

Procedure Step 1 Create repeater equipment. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Equipment > Repeater Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Equipment window is displayed.

4.

To set the parameters of the new repeater equipment in the blank row, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters. l Enter the name of the new repeater equipment. After you enter the name, the system creates a blank row to configure other repeater equipment. l Click a property cell to change the value of the property.

Step 2 Create a repeater. 1.


2.

Choose Repeaters > New from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Properties dialog box is displayed. Alternatively, select the transceiver to which a repeater is added and then click toolbar. Then, you can add a repeater directly in the map window.

on the

3.

To configure the properties of the repeater, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters.

4.

Click OK.

----End

3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


122



multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.

Prerequisites A site has been created on the U-Net.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set the transceiver parameters. For details, see Parameters for Creating Transceivers. Step 5 Click OK. NOTE

If an independent site exists, you can click on the toolbar and move the cursor to the site. When a square frame appears around the site, click the left mouse key. After that, the system automatically creates a transceiver and corresponding cells for the site.

----End


You can group transceivers. 1.


2.


3.

Right-click Transceiver and choose Group By > Grouping Mode. The U-Net automatically groups the transceivers based on the selected grouping mode. Two levels of grouping are supported. Table 3-32 lists the default grouping modes of transceivers. NOTE

You can choose Group By > More and set to display the grouping dimension in Group By.

Table 3-32 Group By

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Grouping Mode

Description

None

No grouping mode is applied.

Polygon

Calculation area.

Network Type

RAT.

Comments

Indicates the description information.

Site Equipment

Indicates the site equipment.


123



l

Grouping Mode

Description

Active

Indicates whether a cell is activated or not.

Frequency Band

Indicates the frequency band of a cell.

Scene

Indicates the scenario of a cell.

BSC ID

Indicates the BSC ID of a GSM or CDMA cell.

RNC Name

Indicates the RNC Name of a UMTS cell.

Alternatively, you can view common properties of a transceiver in the transceiver table and manually set the property columns to be displayed in the table. 1.


2.


3.

Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Transceiver table table is displayed. NOTE

Common engineering parameters such as Total loss DL, Total loss UL, Number of Transmission Antenna Ports, Number of Transmission Antennas, Number of Reception Antennas, and Input Total Loss are displayed in the Transceiver table table by default to reduce the time required for selection.

4.

Right-click in the Transceiver table table and choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu.

5.

In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parameters in the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to be displayed or hidden in the Sites table.

6.

Close the dialog box. The Transceiver table table is updated and displays the property columns based on the preceding settings.

3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the LTE-FDDCell tab page, set LTE-FDD cell parameters, as shown in Figure 3-24. Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells describes the parameters. l Table 3-42 describes the Transmission Mode parameter. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


124



l Table 3-43 describes the Advance Parameters parameter. l Table 3-44 describes the Neighbours list parameter. l Table 3-45 describes the Propagation Models parameter. Figure 3-24 LTE-FDDCell


3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting LTE-FDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Creating Sites This section describes the parameters for creating a site or modifying the properties of a site. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of a site in the Site Properties dialog box. Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a site. This parameter uniquely identifies a site. The U-Net specifies the default name of each new site.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


125



Parameter

Description

Support Type

Indicates the base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a micro base station.

Position NOTE If no map is imported, parameters in this area are X and Y. If a map is imported, parameters in this area are Longitude and Latitude.

Altitude(m)

X

Indicates a geodetic coordinate X (X coordinate).

Y

Indicates a geodetic coordinate Y (Y coordinate).

Longitude

Indicates a longitudinal coordinate.

Latitude

Indicates a latitudinal coordinate.

Real

Indicates the real altitude. l If no map is imported, the default value is 0. l If a map is imported, the default value is the altitude at the center of the map.

DTM

Indicates the altitude obtained from the DTM map. l If no map is imported, the default value is 0. l If a map is imported, the default value is the altitude at the center of the map.

Use Altitude For Calculation

Comments

Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you enter the altitude of a site manually for calculation. Displays the comments on the corresponding site.

Parameters for Creating Transceivers This section describes the parameters used for creating transceivers. You can refer to this section when setting transceiver parameters on the General and Antenna Config tab pages in the Transceiver Properties dialog box or in the Antenna Config table. Table 3-33 Parameters on the General tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.


126



Parameter

Description

Site

Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to. You can click New to create a site.

Hexagon Radius(m)

Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value ranges from 1 to 100000. l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius (m) in the current site template by default. l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty by default.

Transmission in the Number of Antennas area

Number of transmission antennas on a base station.

Reception in the Number of Antennas area

Number of receive antennas on a base station.

Transmission in the Number of Antenna Ports area

Number of transmission antenna ports.

Comments

Comments on a transceiver.

Table 3-34 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter

Description

Antenna ID

ID of an antenna for a transceiver. The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.

Power Ratio

Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Sector ID

ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.

Dx(m)

Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.

Dy(m)

Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.

Longitude

Longitude of an antenna.

Latitude

Latitude of an antenna.

Main Antenna

Main antenna of a transceiver. Each cell has only one main antenna.

Azimuth

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.


127



Parameter

Description

Antenna

Type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the configuration of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna type is the type of the first antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt

Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt

Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Height(m)

Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.

RRU ID

l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver. Equipment properties.

Equipment

For details, see Table 3-35.

Table 3-35 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box Parameter

Description

Input Total Loss

l If you select the check box, you need to manually type the total loss. l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total loss.

Site Equipment TMA

Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.

Feeder

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Antenna feeder. You can click

to

to modify its properties.

Feeder Length(m)

Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

Miscellaneous Loss(dB)

Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)

Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)

Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.


128



Parameter

Description

JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)

Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

Total Loss(dB)

Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

Parameters for Creating Repeaters This section describes the parameters for creating repeaters or repeater equipment. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of repeaters in the Repeater Properties dialog box or the properties of repeater equipment in the Repeater Equipment dialog box.

Parameters in the Repeater Equipment Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of repeater equipment. This parameter uniquely identifies repeater equipment.

Noise Figure(dB)

Indicates the noise figure of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is dB.

Min AMP Gain(dB)

Indicates the minimum amplification gain of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is dB.

Max AMP Gain(dB)

Indicates the maximum amplification gain of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is dB.

Max Output Power(UL)(dBm)

Indicates the maximum uploaded transmit power of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is dBm.

Max Output Power(DL)(dBm)

Indicates the maximum downloaded transmit power of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is dBm.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


129



Parameter

Description

Time Delay(ms)

Indicates the time delay of the repeater equipment. The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the unit is ms.

Parameters in the Repeater Properties Dialog Box Table 3-36 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a repeater. This parameter uniquely identifies a repeater. The U-Net enters the default name of each new site.

Donor

Indicates the donor cell of the repeater.

Equipment

Indicates the repeater equipment.

Dx

Indicates the offset of the repeater to the site in the X direction.

Dy

Indicates the offset of the repeater to the site in the Y direction.

Comments

Displays the comments on the repeater.

Table 3-37 Parameters on the Donor Side tab page Parameter Link Type

Description Air

Indicates the loss of a radio link. The unit is dB.

Microwave

Indicates the loss of a microwave link. The unit is dB.

Optical Fibre

Indicates the loss of an optical cable link. The unit is dB.

Antenna

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Model

Indicates the model of the antenna on the donor side.

Height(m)

Indicates the height of the antenna on the donor side.


130



Parameter

Description Azimuth

Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on the donor side. The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt

Indicates the mechanical downtilt of the antenna on the donor side. The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt

Indicates the electrical downtilt of the antenna on the donor side. The unit is degree.

Feeder

Type

Indicates the type of the feeder on the donor side. You can select a feeder type, click ..., and then modify the properties of the feeders.

Length(m)

l Transmission: Indicates the feeder length on the donor side. l Reception: Indicates the feeder length of the reception equipment on the donor side.

Table 3-38 Parameters on the Coverage Side tab page Parameter

Description

Active

Indicates whether the repeater is active.

Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power.

Total Gain

Antenna

Downlink

Indicates the total gain on the downlink.

Uplink

Indicates the total gain on the uplink.

Model

Indicates the model of the antenna on the coverage side.

Height(m)

Indicates the height of the antenna on the coverage side.

Azimuth

Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on the coverage side. The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt

Indicates the mechanical downtilt of the antenna on the coverage side. The unit is degree.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


131



Parameter

Description Electrical Downtilt

Indicates the electrical downtilt of the antenna on the coverage side. The unit is degree.

Feeder

Type

Indicates the type of the feeder on the coverage side. You can select a feeder type, click ..., and then modify the properties of the feeders. l Transmission: Indicates the feeder length on the coverage side.

Length(m)

l Reception: Indicates the feeder length of the reception equipment on the coverage side.

Table 3-39 Parameters on the Propagation tab page Parameter Main Matrix Main Matrix

Extended Matrix Extended Matrix

Description Propagation Model

Indicates the main propagation model.

Radius(m)

Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagation model.

Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation resolution of the main propagation model.

Propagation Model

Indicates the extended propagation model.

Radius(m)

Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagation model.

Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation resolution of the extended propagation model.

Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.

Site Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a base station template.


132



Parameter

Description

Support Type



Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the altitude of a site for calculation.

Hexagon Radius

Indicates the radius of a cell.

Comments

Description.

Transceiver area on the LTE-FDD tab page Parameter

Description

Transceivers

Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.

Model

Indicates the type of an antenna.

Site Equipment


Mechanical Downtilt

Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.

Electrical Downtilt

Indicates the electrical tilt angle.

Height/Ground(m)

Indicates the height of an antenna.

First Sector Azimuth

Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.







Total Loss(DL)

Indicates the total downlink loss.

Total Loss(UL)

Indicates the total uplink loss.

Comments

Description.

General tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Max Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.


133



Parameter

Description

RS Power(dBm)

Indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier. The unit is dBm.

Actual Load(DL)

Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Actual Load(UL)

Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Target IoT(UL)(dB)

Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.

Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.

CCU IoT(dB)

Indicates the IoT of users in the cell center. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 12.5.

CEU IoT(dB)

Indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge. The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 10.5.

Frequency Band

Indicates a frequency band.

Channel Index

Indicates a channel index.

Reception

Indicates a receiver.

Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. For details about parameter values, see Table 3-40.

Priority

Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is, the higher the priority of the cell is.

Channel Relativity

Indicates whether channel relativity is considered. By default, this option is not selected.

COMP

Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled on the base station. Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for the base station to increase cell edge capacity and average cell throughput. By default, this option is not selected.

IRC

Indicates whether the interference rejection combining (IRC) function is enabled. If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to suppress combining signal interference and increase uplink gain. By default, this option is not selected.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


134



Advance tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page Parameter

Description

Downlink

Indicates the downlink parameters. You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Uplink

Indicates the uplink parameters. You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule

Indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling function. If this option is selected, the system allocates the proper network resources to users during capacity simulation.

ICIC(UL)

Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) in the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge. Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.

ICIC(DL)

l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set in cell attributes is used. l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge. l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC can be enabled automatically and edge band mode can be configured automatically. Users can plan the edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without having to configure the parameter for the cells one by one. Edge Frequency Style(UL)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).


135



Parameter

Description

Edge Frequency Style(DL)

Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users in the downlink. l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3). l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following 4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1 (AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1 (LowPowerReuse1). l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.

Power Control

Indicates the power control in the downlink.

Target Load

Indicates the target load.

Control Channel Overhead

l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of RBs of the entire bandwidth. l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink PDCCH.

Max Schedule Users

Indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on the uplink and downlink.

RS SINR Access Threshold (DL)(dB)

Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB.

Schedule Policy

Indicates a scheduling policy. l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm. l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling algorithm and the maximum signal to interference ratio. l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the maximum signal to interference ratio.

TTI Bundling

Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.

VMIMO

Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output (VMIMO) is considered. By default, this option is not selected.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


136



Power Offset tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page Parameter

Description

PBCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PA(dB)

Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDCCH RE relative to that on the RS RE. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.

CCU PA(dB)

Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.

CEU PA(dB)

Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.

PB(dB)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.


137



Propagation Models tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page Parameter

Description

Propagation Model

Indicates a propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area, it indicates the main propagation model. l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix area, it indicates the extended propagation model.

Radius(m)

Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.

Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.

Table 3-40 Description of Transmission Mode Values Value

Description

TM1

Indicates a single antenna port for eNodeBs.

TM2

Indicates the open-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R/8T8R configuration.

TM3

Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM4

Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM6

Indicates the closed-loop transmit diversity, which is used for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM7

Indicates the signal-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.

TM8

Indicates the signal-stream and dual-stream beamforming. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

OL_Adaptive

Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2 and TM3.

CL_Adaptive

Indicates the closed-loop adaptive handover between TM4 and TM6.

OL_CL_Adaptive

Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6.


138



Value

Description

TM7_MIMO_Adaptive

Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R8 specification and do not support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM7. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.

TM8_MIMO_Adaptive

Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are compatible with the 3GPP R9 specification and support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM8. This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD network.

Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-FDD cell or modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD cell.

LTE-FDDCell Tab Page Table 3-41 LTE-FDDCell tab page Parameter

Description

GCI

Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.

Name

Indicates the name of a carrier. The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Active

Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

Frequency Band


Channel Index


Target Load(UL)

Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Target Load(DL)

Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Actual Load(UL)


Actual Load(DL)


RS Power(dBm)



139



Parameter

Description

PBCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

Max Power(dBm)


Actual IoT(UL)(dB)


High Speed

Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to one of the following values: l LowSpeed l HighSpeed l HighwaySpeed

Radius(m)


Min Root Sequence Index

Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor)

Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship). The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Reception




Priority


PB(dB)



140



Parameter

Description

Schedule Policy


PCI

Indicates the physical ID of a cell.

PCI Reuse Distance(Km)

Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.

PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor)

Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship).

Scene


MCC

Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).

MNC

Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).

CI

Indicates the ID of a cell.

DlEarfcn

Indicates a downlink ARFCN.

UlEarfcn

Indicates an uplink ARFCN.

TAC

Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).

Local Cell ID

Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.

Reselect Priority

Indicates the cell reselection priority.

PA(dB)


CCU PA(dB)


CEU PA(dB)


CCU IoT(dB)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


141



Parameter

Description

CEU IoT(dB)


Alpha

This is an open loop power control parameter and indicates the path loss compensation coefficient.

Po(dBm)

This is an open loop power control parameter.

TTI Bundling

Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered. By default, this option is not selected.

VMIMO


IRC


COMP


Channel Relativity


Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. For the details of the value, see Table 3-42.

VIP

For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot power.

Throughput(UL)

Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Throughput(DL)

Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(UL)

Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


142



Parameter

Description

Cell Throughput(DL)

Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Density

Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 800.

Azimuth Locked

Whether the azimuth is locked.

Azimuth Min. Value

Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is -20.

Azimuth Max. Value

Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is 20.

Electronic Downtilt Locked

Whether the electrical tilt is locked.

Electronic Downtilt Min. Value

Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is -10.

Electronic Downtilt Max. Value

Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is 14.

RsPower Locked

Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.

RsPower Min. Value(dB)

Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 10.

RsPower Max. Value(dB)

Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 20.

Fitness Threshold(%)

Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 90.

State

Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage. The value can be Working or Outage. The default value is Working.

Advance Parameters

Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button. For details, see Table 3-43.

Neighbors list

Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button. For details, see Table 3-44.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


143



Parameter

Description

Propagation Models

Sets the propagation model by clicking this button. For details, see Table 3-45.


Description

TM1


TM2


TM3


TM4


TM6


TM7


TM8


OL_Adaptive


CL_Adaptive


OL_CL_Adaptive


TM7_MIMO_Adaptive


TM8_MIMO_Adaptive


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


144



Table 3-43 Advance Parameters tab page Parameter

Description



ICIC(UL)

Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge. Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.

ICIC(DL)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



145



Parameter

Description



Power Control

Indicates the power control on the downlink.

Edge Frequency Style

Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users on the uplink and downlink.



Max Schedule Users


Target IoT(UL)(dB)


Table 3-44 Cell Neighbors tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Intra-frequency Neighbors

Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-frequency Neighbors

Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors

Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.


146



Table 3-45 Propagation tab page Parameter

Description

Propagation Model


Radius(m)


Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation model.

Propagation Model

Indicates the extension propagation model.

Radius(m)


Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation precision of the extended propagation model.

General Tab Page Table 3-46 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter

Description

Antenna ID


Power Ratio


Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude


Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Mechanical Downtilt Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



147



Parameter

Description

Electrical Downtilt


Height(m)


RRU ID


Equipment


Antenna Config Tab Page Table 3-47 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter

Description

Antenna ID


Power Ratio


Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude


Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt



148



Parameter

Description

Height(m)


RRU ID


Equipment



Description

Input Total Loss


Site Equipment TMA


Feeder

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



to


Feeder Length(m)






JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)


Total Loss(dB)



149



3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.

3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD Prediction Counters This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. NOTE

Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut menu.

Table 3-49 lists the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 3-49 Description of LTE-FDD prediction counters

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Category

Counter

Description

Coverage by Signal Level (DL)

Best Server

Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that receive downlink signals.

DL RSRP

Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS) received from the primary serving cell.

DL BandWidth RSRP

Strength of downlink reference signals on the entire bandwidth.

DL RSSI

Total power received by a UE on the entire bandwidth. The power includes the receive power of the serving cell, interference power of other cells, and the noise power of the UE.

DL PDSCH Signal Level

Power received on the PDSCH on a resource element (RE).

Handover Area

Whether an area is a handover area.

DL PBCH Signal Level

PBCH signal strength on an RE.

DL PCFICH Signal Level

PCFICH signal strength on an RE.


150



Category

Counter

Description

DL PDCCH Signal Level

Downlink PDCCH signal strength.

DL PHICH Signal Level

PHICH signal strength on an RE.

DL SCH Signal Level

SCH signal strength on an RE.

DL ICIC Zone

Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC threshold.

Overlapping Zones

Number of cells in a coverage spot.

Pilot Pollution

Determines whether a point has pilot pollution and checks the number of points having pilot pollution. To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised to select With Shadow. NOTE By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot that reaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn about pilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage area intuitively.

Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(DL)

Coverage by Signal Level (UL)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

DL RS SINR

Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal that a UE receives. This counter reflects the quality of the downlink reference signal.

DL PDSCH SINR

SINR of the downlink PDSCH. This counter reflects the quality of the downlink PDSCH.

DL RSRQ

Quality of the received downlink reference signals.

Geometry

Difference between the power of the strongest signal that a UE receives on the entire bandwidth and the power of the interference and noise that the UE receives on the entire bandwidth.

DL PBCH SINR

Downlink PBCH SINR.

DL PCFICH SINR

Downlink PCFICH SINR.

DL PDCCH SINR

Downlink PDCCH SINR.

DL PHICH SINR

Downlink PHICH SINR.

DL SCH SINR

Downlink SCH SINR.

UL RSRP

Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.

UL User RB Txpower

Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).

UL User Band Txpower

Uplink transmit power on the user bandwidth.


151



Category

Counter

Description

UL PUSCH Signal Level

Power that a cell receives on the PUSCH RE.

PRACH Signal Level

PRACH signal strength on an RE.

UL ICIC ZONE

Uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.

PUCCH Signal Level

PUCCH signal strength on an RE.

UL RS SINR

SINR of the uplink reference signal.

UL PUSCH SINR

SINR of the uplink PUSCH. This counter reflects the quality of the uplink PUSCH.

PRACH SINR

PRACH SINR.

PUCCH SINR

PUCCH SINR.

Coverage by MCS(DL)

PDSCH MCS

The highest MCS supported by the downlink PDSCH.

Coverage by Throughput (DL)

DL MAC Peak Throughput

Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

DL Application Peak Throughput

Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.

Coverage by MCS(UL)

PUSCH MCS

The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.

Coverage by Throughput (UL)

UL MAC Peak Throughput

Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

UL Application Peak Throughput

Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.

Coverage by C/(I+N) Level(UL)

Predicting IRC gain is supported if Actual IoT(UL) (dB) is set and the IRC.xml file is modified.

Procedure for Performing Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 3-25 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


152



Figure 3-25 Procedure of prediction

LTE-FDD Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm through a schematic diagram. Figure 3-26 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


153



Figure 3-26 LTE-FDD prediction algorithm

Table 3-50 describes the processes shown in Figure 3-26. Table 3-50 Description of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm Procedur e

Operation

Description

1

Traversing all the cells

Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction counters of this cell are not calculated.

2

Obtaining the path loss matrix

l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the path loss matrix. l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained directly.

3

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Querying the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss

You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the calculation of link loss.


154



Procedur e

Operation

Description

4

Predicting slow fading by using the shadowing margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability. Certain power of the base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadowing margin. You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing margin into account during the calculation of link loss.

5

Calculating the DL RSRP to determine the primary serving cell

The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at the downlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.

6

Calculating the power of interference noises to determine the handover area

You can calculate the power of interference noises and determine the handover area.

7

Calculating counters of the traffic channel and common channel based on the BIN

Calculate the DL RSSI, DL RS SINR, and traffic channel counters. The U-Net calculates the PUSCH SINR when the uplink throughput reaches the maximum value. When the PUSCH SINR is calculated, the PUSCH MCS and PUSCH Peak Throughput are also calculated.

8

Displaying prediction results

The U-Net displays the prediction results in different colors in the window and provides a prediction report.

Basic Knowledge of Link Loss Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink. The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows: l

Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

l

Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 3-51 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


155



Table 3-51 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor

Meaning

Loss caused by the human body

Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to the shielding or absorption of the human body.

Feeder loss of a terminal

Loss of the feeder on a terminal.

Antenna gain of a terminal

Gain of the antenna on a terminal.

Path loss

Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.

Shadow fading

When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains, buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow of the magnetic field exits. When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This fading is called shadow fading.

Penetration loss

Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles, and leaves.

Antenna gain of a base station

Gain of the antenna on a base station.

Total loss of the base station

Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs, feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning arresters), and connectors

3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end. You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes how to manually calculate the path loss.

Prerequisites l

Base stations (sites and cells) are available.

l

Propagation models are assigned to cells.

Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Calculation


156



– If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again. l

Force calculation If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node. If you need to...

Then...

Calculate

Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.

Calculate forcibly

Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted. The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net starts calculating the path loss. Step 5 Query the calculation results After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project Name.losses folder that saves the project file. Click

to stop ongoing calculations.

Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 3-27.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


157



Figure 3-27 Event Viewer

----End

Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory.

3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation During the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certain prediction counters.

Context l

In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL RS SINR.

l

In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.

l

In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.

l

In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/ Nt.

l

In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for the following predication counters: Coverage By CIR.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


158



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter. Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If ...

Then ...

The map information is not imported

Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.

The map information is imported

Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation.

NOTE

For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.


3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Prerequisites l

A U-Net project is already created.

l

The geographic data is imported.

l

The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups. Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties. 1.

In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.

2.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.

3.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


159



4.

In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page. You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation model.

5.

Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.

6.

Click OK.

Step 2 Skip this step if you have set the power offset of the PBCH channel relative to the RS channel in the cell properties. Otherwise, proceed with the following steps. 1.

Select a transceiver in the map window.

2.


3.

Set the related parameters on the cell property tab. For example, to calculate the DL PBCH Signal Level prediction indicator, you need to set the PBCH to RS parameter.

Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28 New

Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD Prediction Counters. Step 6 Click Next. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.See Figure 3-29 For parameter description, see Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


160



Figure 3-29 Group Properties

Step 8 Click OK Step 9 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End

Follow-up Procedure After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.

3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell The U-Net can predict the performance of a single cell in a specified area. In this case, other cells are deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe the prediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.

Prerequisites l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

The geographic data is imported. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161



l


l

The calculation area is created.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the name of a prediction group by referring to Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box, and select prediction items for the prediction group. Step 5 Click Next. Then, set properties such as calculation area, prediction conditions, prediction bands for new prediction groups by referring to Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog Box. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Optional: If you clear Calculate Now in Step 4, right-click the prediction group and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End

Follow-up Procedure The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view details.

3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and view detailed KPI result reports.

Prerequisites The prediction calculation is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


162



Option

Description

Re-calculate counters.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item. 2. Choose Unlock from the shortcut menu. This counter is in the unlocked state. If Lock is displayed in the shortcut menu, this counter is in the unlocked state. 3. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. 4. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. All the unlocked counters in this group will be used for calculation. If all the counters are in the locked state, Calculate is unavailable.

Add or delete a counter.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. 2. Choose Edit Studies from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed dialog box, select or clear the check box of the counter to be added or deleted. 4. Click OK. 5. Perform the following operations as required. l if a counter is added, the system displays the new counter under the prediction group node in the navigation tree. In this case, you need to re-calculate counters. For detailed operations, see Re-calculate counters. l If a counter is deleted, the system deletes the counter from the prediction group node in the navigation tree. In addition, the corresponding rendering color is removed. If the deleted counter is Best Server and a traffic map uses this prediction group, data of this prediction group will also be deleted from the traffic map.

View detailed report on a counter.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item. 2. Right-click and choose Generate Report from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed dialog box, view detailed information about the counter. For detailed operations, see Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result Reports. NOTE You can select a hot spot from the drop-down list box in the Statistics Zone area to view information about the specified hot spot.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


163



Option

Description

Set the properties of a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as display color on the Display tab page. Lock or unlock counters in batches.

All the unlocked counters in the prediction group are calculated in batches.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. 2. Right-click and select or clear the check box of Studies Locked from the shortcut menu. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. 2. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.

----End

3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map) After calculating the prediction, you can query the prediction results in different legend colors in the map window.


Procedure Step 1 Optional: Set the legend information and display properties of prediction. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.

3.

Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Study Properties dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click the Display tab.

5.

Set items such as counter range, display color, and transparency.

6.

Select the ranges to be displayed in the Legend window. See Figure 3-30.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


164



Figure 3-30 Display tab

7.

Select Add to legend. The selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.

8.

Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.

9.

Click OK.

Step 2 Query the legend information. Choose Window > Legend on the menu bar. The Legend window is displayed. In the displayed window, you can query the name and color corresponding to each range. If you have selected Show Statistic, you can also query the coverage area corresponding to a range and the percentage of the area to the whole calculation area. Step 3 Query the prediction results of each cell. The map displays the cell coverage according to the preset legend color and transparency. In addition, the Legend window displays the size and percentage of coverage areas, helping you to query the coverage and perform relevant analysis. ----End

Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart) After performing a coverage prediction, you can view each coverage prediction counter in the cumulative distribution function (CDF) chart, inverse CDF chart, and probability distribution function (PDF) chart based on coverage prediction groups. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


165



Prerequisites The coverage prediction calculation is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Groupx and choose Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-31. The following takes the CDF chart for example. Figure 3-31 Statistics

Step 3 Select a prediction counter, hot spot area, statistical area, and display mode from the Study, Zone, Statistics Area, and Figure Style drop-down list boxes respectively. The CDF, inverse CDF, or PDF chart of the selected counter is displayed in the Statistics dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


166


3 LTE-FDD Network Planning NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Zone drop-down list box to view the information about the selected hot spot. l For the LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area, DL ICIC Zone, UL ICIC Zone, Pilot Pollution, PDSCH MCS, and PUSCH MCS cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. You can select DL MAC Peak Throughput, UL MAC Peak Throughput, DL Application Peak Throughput, and UL Application Peak Throughput to view the average throughput and cell edge throughput. l For the GSM network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area, Coverage Area, and Coding Scheme cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. l For the UMTS network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area, HSDPA CQI, Pilot Pollution, and Number Of Service cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values.

----End


Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu to save the chart in the Statistics dialog box. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.

l

Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu to print the chart in the Statistics dialog box.

l

Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the chart in the Statistics dialog box to the clipboard.

3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result After calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, after improving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare the prediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of prediction analysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.

Analyzing Prediction Results The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences. This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.

Procedure Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group. Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized. Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage. Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.

3.

Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


167



1.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.

2.

Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result. 1.


2.

Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.

3.

Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left. NOTE

l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors on the map window. l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group

4.

Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.

5.

View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.

----End

Example This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison. The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click Antenna Config tab Page.

5.

Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.

After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment. Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window. To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.


To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.

l

To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu.

l

To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.

Analyzing Terrain Profiles by Using Point Analysis This section describes how to analyze terrain profiles by using the point analysis function. You can analyze the signal receive status between a cell and a terminal on the terrain profile by using the point analysis function. A terrain profile is calculated through the propagation model in real time. Therefore, you can analyze any selected point on the terrain profile. After a propagation Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


168



model is allocated to a cell, the U-Net provides the profile terrain and calculates the path loss between the cell and the receive point and the receive level of the corresponding terminal based on the NE data and geographic data.

Prerequisites l

The geographic data has been imported.

l

Base stations are available.

Procedure Step 1 Click

on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell and a carrier from the Transceiver and Cell drop-down list boxes respectively. Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set cell edge coverage probability in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%) text box. If Indoor Coverage is selected, penetration loss will be taken into account. Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, select a capacity simulation group, terminal type, service type, and mobility type from the Simulation Group, Terminal, Service, and Mobility drop-down list boxes, respectively. Then, set neighboring cell PDSCH load and neighboring cell PDCCH load in the Neighbour PDSCH Load and Neighbour PDCCH Load text boxes respectively. Step 5 Switch back to the Profile tab page and click a point on the map. The point changes to

, which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and

the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the pointer to move the

cursor.

NOTE

The preceding operations can also be performed on other tab pages including the Reception tab page. The cursor, however, moves slowly on these tab pages. Therefore, you are advised to switch to the Profile tab page to perform the operation.

Step 6 On the Profile tab page, view the terrain profile analysis information. l The grey area indicates the terrain condition between the cell and the receive point. The X-coordinate indicates the geographic distance between the cell and the receive point. The Y-coordinate indicates the altitude. l The blue ellipse indicates the Fresnel region of diffraction. l The green straight line indicates the line-of-sight distance. l Select DL RSRP to view the receive level of the terminal. l Select Path Loss to view the path loss between the cell and the receive point. l Propagation model used by the cell. l Geographic distance between the cell and the terminal. ----End

Follow-up Procedure l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

View detailed link budget. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169



Right-click the profile and choose Link Budget from the shortcut menu. The Link Budget dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter Description of the Link Budget Window. l

View detailed information about the propagation model. You can perform this operation only when the propagation model is SPM. Right-click the profile and choose Model Details from the shortcut menu. The Model Details dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter Description of the Model Details Window.

l

Copy a profile. Right-click the profile and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. The profile is copied to the clipboard of the operating system.

l

You can move the cursor to dynamically view the profile analysis information about any point.

Analyzing Prediction Results by Using the Point Analysis Function After prediction is complete, you can further analyze the prediction of certain positions by using the point analysis function. For example, you can check the list of cells that receive signals and analyze the strength of received signals.

Prerequisites l


l

Base stations are available.



Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field. Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%). Step 4 Click a point on the map. The point changes to


the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the

cursor.

Step 5 On the Reception tab page, check the list of cells from which signals can be received and check the strength of the received signal. The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map. Keep the cursor at the selected point. Then, you can check the received signal strength of each cell. Step 6 Query the statistical information about the selected point on the Results tab page. The statistics are related to the following items: Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


170



l Longitude, latitude, and altitude l Clutter class l List of cells from which signals can be received, and the received signal strength ----End

3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.

Exporting Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. Step 3 Choose Export Results from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the Export Results dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches. Step 5 Optional: You can also select the detailed export contents (such as the name, coverage area, current coverage percentage, and cumulative coverage percentage) of each counter in Select Statistics Data. Step 6 Click Export. ----End

Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The file is named in the following format: Name of the prediction group_Name of the counter.Export format.

Exporting the Detailed LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.

Procedure l

Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area. You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points in this area.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


171



l

1.


2.


Then...

Export the detailed prediction results of a prediction group

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.

Export the detailed prediction results of a single counter in a prediction group


3.

Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.

5.

Click Export.

The U-Net exports the detailed prediction results of Bin points based on the pilot power. This function supports the single-mode network only. You can specify the range of receive level and just export the detailed prediction results of Bin points in the specified range. 1.


2.


Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP.

NOTE

You can set ranges in the property dialog box corresponding to the DL RSRP.

3.

Choose Export BIN By > DL RSRP from the shortcut menu. – When you do not select the DL RSRP indicator when performing prediction calculation, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power. – The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.

4.

Select the range of the DL RSRP. The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points whose DL RSRP is within the selected range.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


172



5.

Click Export.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. By default, the file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the default file name is PredictionData.csv. The following contents are exported: l

BINID: It is automatically identified by the U-Net.

l

X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates are exported.

l

Counter value: indicates the value of selected counter.

Printing Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include a prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.

Prerequisites l

The prediction calculation is complete.

l

The printer is properly set. Choose File > Print Setting. In the displayed Print Setting dialog box, click Printer....

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. Step 3 Select counters to be printed from the prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-32. Figure 3-32 Select counters to be printed

Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx. Step 5 Choose Batch Print from the shortcut menu. The Batch Print dialog box is displayed. Step 6 In Select Polygon, select the target area for print. If you select a polygon, the external rectangle of this polygon is the target area for print. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


173



Step 7 In Prediction, select the counters to be printed. Step 8 Click Print. The coverage prediction results of all the selected counters are printed. ----End

3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data After a coverage prediction group is calculated, you can use DT data to adjust the group to improve the accuracy of feature data and positioning. If no DT data is to be adjusted, you can skip this section.

Prerequisites l

Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been imported or created.

l

Coverage prediction about the DL RSRP counter has been completed.

l

A DT data file has been imported.

Procedure Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose DT Adjust Feature Database from the shortcut menu. The DT Adjust Feature Database dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33. Figure 3-33 DT Adjust Feature Database

Step 4 Set related parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameters for Adjusting the DT Feature Database. Step 5 Click Adjust. ----End

3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data This section describes how to export data from the feature database after the prediction is performed to implement geographical positioning. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


174



Context Feature data indicates the geographical distribution of network signals. On an actual network, a geographical location may be covered by signals from multiple cells. The cell signal strength and cell information are the signal features of this geographical location. The feature database contains information about the signal features of all geographical locations on a network. The MR positioning technology determines the geographical information about the actual measurement points by matching the actual network coverage information and the feature database. This function exports Top N data of all received levels within each lattice and applies only to single-mode networks.

Procedure Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box shown in Figure 3-34 is displayed. Figure 3-34 Export By Top Signal Level

Step 4 Set the minimum value and the top N maximum receive levels to be exported. Step 5 Click Export. Step 6 Set the save path, file name, and file type. Then, export the preset information. NOTE

l To use this function successfully, you must select the DL RSRP counter when creating a prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-35. l To export top N receive levels within the lattice, you must set TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction group. This parameter indicates that the top N maximum receive levels will be calculated, as shown in Figure 3-36.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


175



Figure 3-35 New_Prediction_Group

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


176



Figure 3-36 TopNSignalLevel

----End

3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction This section describes the interfaces and parameters for creating prediction groups and exporting prediction results by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


177



Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Group Name

Name of a prediction group. This parameter uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net provides a default name for each created prediction group in this parameter field.

Prediction Type

Prediction type.

Study Selected

Prediction counter.

Calculate Now

Whether to calculate each prediction counter immediately.

Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog Box Table 3-52 Parameters on the General tab Page Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a prediction group.

Resolution(m)

Precision of the prediction.

Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)

Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area and Overlapping Zones are set.

Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)

Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area and Overlapping Zones are set.

Polygon

Calculation area for the prediction.

Neighbour PDSCH Load

Whether the load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Neighbour PDCCH Load

Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

With Shadow

Whether the shadow fading is taken into account in the calculation.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability

Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.

Indoor Coverage

Whether the penetration loss is taken into account.


178



Table 3-53 Parameters on the Condition tab Page Parameter

Description

Signal Level(DL)(dBm)

Receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.

Signal Level(UL)(dBm)

Receive threshold of the uplink reference signal.

Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm)

Interference threshold.

Terminal

Terminal type.

Service

Service type.

Mobility

Mobility type.

Table 3-54 Parameters on the Advanced tab Page Parameter

Description

Frequency Name

Name of a frequency band.

Channel Index

Frequency corresponding to a frequency band.

TopNSignalLevel

TopN maximum receive levels to be calculated.

Parameters for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches This section describes the parameters for exporting prediction results in .csv, .mif, or .jpg format in batches. You can refer to this section when exporting prediction results from the Export Results dialog box. Parameter

Description

Path

Indicates the path to save the data to be exported. You can click Browse to specify a save path.

Select Export Content

Selects the contents to be exported.

Select Polygon

Selects an area where counters are to be exported.

Prediction

Group

Indicates the name of a prediction group.

Study

Indicates the object to be exported, that is, the prediction counter items in each prediction group.

MIF

Exports the prediction chart in .mif format. The exported file contains projection information.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

JPG

Exports the prediction chart in .jpg format.

Statistics

Exports the prediction report in .csv format.


179



Parameter Select Statistics Data

Description Name

Indicates the name of an exported prediction counter.

Area(km2)

Indicates the coverage area of an exported prediction counter.

Percentage(%)

Indicates the percentage of the coverage area of an exported prediction counter.

Cumulate(%)

Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area of an exported prediction counter.

Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result Reports This section describes the parameters for viewing detailed prediction result reports. You can refer to this section when viewing the detailed prediction result reports in the Export Data window.

Parameters in the Export Data Window Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a KPI. The value segments of the KPI are listed under the KPI name.

Coverage Area(km2)

Indicates the coverage area.

% of Calculate Area

Indicates the percentage of the calculation area. Indicates the percentage of the calculation area within the value segment to the total coverage area of this KPI.

% of Cumulate Calculate Area

Indicates the cumulative percentage of the calculation area. For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a list sorted in ascending order is the sum of the value in row 3 and the values in all the subsequent rows. Click

% of Coverage Area

or

to sort the list in ascending or descending order.

Indicates the percentage of the coverage area. For example, the value in row 3 is the percentage of the coverage area of row 3 to the total coverage area.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

% of Cumulate Coverage Area

Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.

DefaultName

Indicates the default name.

For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a list sorted in ascending order is the sum of the percentage of row 3 and the percentages in all the subsequent rows.


180



Parameters for Adjusting the DT Feature Database This section describes the parameters for adjusting the DT feature database in the DT Adjust Feature Database dialog box. Parameter

Description

Drive Test File

DT data file. Selected from a drop-down list. The default value is All.

Clutter Resolution(m)

Indicates the clutter resolution. The default value is 300.

Clutter Shift Threshold(%)

Indicates the clutter shift threshold. The default value is 50.

3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report.

3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation This chapter describes the basic knowledge of capacity simulation, including the relations between traffic parameters and the capacity simulation algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the capacity simulation function by learning the basic knowledge.

Process of Capacity Simulation This section describes the process for performing capacity simulation through the U-Net. Figure 3-37 shows the process of capacity simulation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


181



Figure 3-37 Process of capacity simulation

Table 3-55 describes the process of capacity simulation. Table 3-55 Description of the capacity simulation process Procedure

Operation

1

3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters

2

3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps

3

3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group

4

Choose Calculate from the corresponding shortcut menu.

5

3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result

Basic Knowledge of Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the information about the average load status of the network by means of simulation based on specific UE distribution. Traffic parameters, which reflect the basic information about UE distribution, include the UE type, mobility type, terminal type, service type, environment type, MCS, and receiver. Traffic parameters can be used to generate specific traffic map. Figure 3-38 shows the relationship between traffic parameters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


182



Figure 3-38 Relationship between traffic parameters

Table 3-56 describes the meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters. Table 3-56 Meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters Traffic Parameter

Meaning

Relationship with Other Parameters

MIMO

Describes the number of transmit and receive antennas working in multiple input multiple output (MIMO) mode and the gains brought on the capacity by spatial multiplexing.

Used to set properties of the receiver.

MCS

Bearing efficiency of the receiver.

Used to set properties of the receiver.

Mobility Type

Describes the moving speed of a terminal.

Used to set the receiver, environment type, and vector-based traffic map.

Service Type

Describes information about the service model.

Used to set the user service type and the traffic map that is based on cell coverage.

Receiver

Describes the demodulation capability of the receiver.

l Depends on the mobility, MIMO, bit error rate (BER), transmission mode, and channel information. l Used to set the terminal type.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


183



Traffic Parameter

Meaning

Relationship with Other Parameters

Terminal Type

Describes information about the terminal, such as the maximum transmit power.

l Depends on the information about the receiver. l Used to set the UE type.

UE Type

Describes information about the UE type (common UE or VIP UE).

l Depends on the terminal type and the service type. l Used to set the environment type and vector-based traffic map.

Environme nt Type

Describes the information about the environment.

l Depends on the mobility type and the UE type. l Used to set the environment-based traffic map.

Capacity Simulation Algorithm This section describes the capacity simulation algorithm. The U-Net uses the Monte Carlo algorithm for the capacity simulation of the LTE-FDD system. That is, the U-Net obtains the information about the network through a series of snapshots.

Overall Process of Capacity Simulation The Monte Carlo algorithm is applicable to static simulation. By using the Monte Carlo algorithm, you can obtain statistics and evaluation results of a network through a great number of random and instant samples. By processing the statistics obtained through multiple snapshots, you can learn about the overall performance of the network. Figure 3-39 shows the overall process of capacity simulation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


184



Figure 3-39 Overall process of capacity simulation

Table 3-57 describes the overall process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-39. Table 3-57 Description of the overall process of capacity simulation Procedur e

Operation

Description

1

Initializing cell information

Initialize cell information, which involves determining the cell calculation area, calculating the RS RE power, assigning RB data power, calculating noises, and determining activated cells.

2

Determining whether the number of current snapshots is not greater than the total number of snapshots

If the number of current snapshots is greater, the simulation result can truly reflect the network performance but the simulation takes a longer time.

Collecting the statistics of a snapshot

A snapshot refers to a snapshot captured for a network. You can collect the statistics of a snapshot by referring to Process of the Simulation Within a Snapshot and save the statistical result for the final simulation.

3

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

When the number of current snapshots is not greater than the total number of snapshots, the system starts to calculate the current snapshots. Otherwise, the system collects the statistics of the final simulation result.


185



Procedur e

Operation

Description

4

Number of current snapshots++

After the calculation within a snapshot is complete, calculation of the next snapshot starts.

5

Processing simulation results

After the simulation of all the snapshots is complete, the UNet starts to process the simulation results and generates a statistical report.

Process of the Simulation Within a Snapshot To work efficiently, the U-Net cannot dynamically simulate the instantaneous change of the radio network for a long time. Therefore, it can only statically simulate the network through a series of snapshots. The network information at different time is different but relevant. The UNet adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network information according to transmission time interval (TTI) within a snapshot. The unit of the TTI is millisecond. When a snapshot is complete, the U-Net calculates the average value of all the TTI instantaneous information within the snapshot and uses the average value as the statistical result of the snapshot. Figure 3-40 shows the simulation within a snapshot.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


186



Figure 3-40 Process of the simulation within a snapshot

Table 3-58 describes the process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-40. Table 3-58 Description of the simulation within a snapshot Procedur e

Operation

Description

1

Generating UEs

UEs are generated one time for each snapshot and distribute a certain number of UEs to the specified areas. NOTE The UE number and areas are determined by the traffic map.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

2

Querying path loss

Query the existing path loss matrix based on the UE geographical location and obtain the path loss values between the UE and each cell.

3

Calculating relevant counters

The U-Net determines the primary serving cell based on the highest DL RSRP of each UE. The U-Net also initializes the SINR and noise information about the PDSCH and PUSCH.


187



Procedur e

Operation

Description

4

Determining whether the number of current TTIs is not greater than the total number of TTIs

A larger number of TTIs indicates a more stable network and more accurate simulation result. The simulation, however, may take a longer time.

5

Collecting the statistics of a TTI

You can calculate the instantaneous statistical results of a TTI by referring to Process of the Simulation Within a TTI and save the statistical result for the final processing of the snapshot.

6

Number of current TTIs++

After the calculation within a TTI is complete, calculation of the next TTI starts.

7

Processing statistical results within a snapshot

After the calculation of all the TTIs is complete, the U-Net starts to calculate the average value of all the TTIs within the snapshot.

If the number of TTIs exceeds the threshold, no operation will be performed for the exceeded TTIs. When the number of current TTIs is not greater than the total number of TTIs, the U-Net starts the calculation of the current TTIs. Otherwise, the system collects the statistics of the final snapshot result.

Process of the Simulation Within a TTI You can collect the statistics of the instantaneous simulation result of each TTI by using the resource allocation algorithm. The U-Net performs admission control, scheduling, interference coordination, and power control for UEs within each TTI. Figure 3-41 shows the simulation within a TTI.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


188



Figure 3-41 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-FDD)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


189



Figure 3-42 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-TDD)

Table 3-59 describes the process of the simulation within a TTI.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


190



Table 3-59 Description of the simulation within a TTI Operation

Description

Admission load control on the uplink and downlink

On an actual network, UEs may initiate service requests at any time. When resources are insufficient and the service satisfaction rate is low, UEs cannot connect to the network. When resources are sufficient and the service satisfaction rate is high, UEs can connect to the network after the resources are successfully allocated. In admission control, the system determines whether a UE enters the scheduling queue or suspending queue based on the RB resource usage of the system, the packet loss rate of voice services, and the service satisfaction rate.

Uplink and downlink scheduling

In scheduling, the U-Net allocates time and frequencies resources for each UE based on the SINR of the UE channel, requirement on the service rate, and terminal power.

Uplink and downlink inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC).

The LTE system uses the 1 x 3 x 1 frequency reuse mode. All the cells can use all the bandwidths supported by the system. Therefore, intercell interference is unavoidable, especially for UEs at the border of a cell.

Power control on the uplink and downlink

l In power control on the uplink, the transmit power of UEs is adjusted to control the network interference at a certain level, ensuring the throughput of UEs at the border of a cell.

In ICIC, the edge band of a cell is separated from that of the adjacent cell by means of frequency domain coordination. This reduces interference between adjacent cells and improves performance of UEs at the border of a cell.

l Downlink power control is to adjust the transmit power the eNodeB sends frequency resources to the UEs. Uplink and downlink measurement

The U-Net obtains the predicted channel status value based on the scheduling, ICIC, and power control results. Then, the U-Net calculates the SINR and uses it as the input value for the next TTI.

Processing of statistical results within a TTI

The U-Net starts to process the statistical result of the current TTIs only when the number of current TTIs exceeds the threshold on the number of TTIs. NOTE When the network is started, it is not stable. At this time, the instantaneous result obtained by the U-Net cannot be used to evaluate the network performance. The period from the time when the network is started to the time when the network works stably is called the warm-up period of the network, which can be automatically identified by the simulation function. To obtain accurate and stable statistical data, collect statistics after the warm-up period ends. Threshold on the number of TTIs = Warm-up period/Duration of the TTI = Warm-up period.

Capacity Simulation Feature Description If each antenna under a transceiver has a unique RRU ID, the cell for the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


191



The SFN is supported only when the antenna configuration is 2T2R or 4T4R. NOTE

In LTE-TDD mode, the MU_BF feature is not selected.

l

When the antenna configuration is 2T2R, VMIMO is not supported.

l

When the antenna configuration is 4T4R, VMIMO is supported. – If the serving cell for a user is an SFN cell, the target RRUs of the paring users must be the same. If the target RRU of any user is changed, the user exits the paring.

3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps After setting traffic parameters, you need to create a traffic map for the capacity simulation calculation. During the calculation of capacity simulation, the U-Net generates users based on the traffic map, and the number of users is determined by the traffic parameters.

Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environment You can set the traffic of each area based on the type of the geographic environment, such as an urban area, a suburb area, or a densely populated area.

Prerequisites l

Traffic parameters are configured.

l

Polygons are created.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map > Traffic Map(User). Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure 3-43. Figure 3-43 Select Map Type

Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Environment. Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the environment-based traffic map, such as the environment types of each area. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


192



For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Environments. Step 7 Click OK. The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node. ----End

Follow-up Procedure When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity simulation calculation.

Creating a Traffic Map Based on Vectors You can set the traffic of special geographic conditions such as railways, highways, and densely populated areas.

Prerequisites l


l

Vector objects are created.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Vector. Step 5 Click Create Map. The Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the vector-based traffic map, such as the number of subscribers for each service, traffic characteristics, and weight of each clutter. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Vectors. Step 7 Click OK. The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node. ----End


Creating a Traffic Map Based on Cell Coverage You can set the service usage and traffic volume or throughput of each cell based on the actual coverage of the cells. Before creating a traffic map, you must obtain the coverage prediction results of each cell. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


193



Prerequisites l


l

The calculation of the Best Server counter is complete.

Context

CAUTION Users that are generated on the basis of the cell coverage are distributed in the areas specified by the calculated Best Server of each cell. Therefore, before creating a traffic map based on the cell coverage, create the prediction group and complete the calculation of the Best Server counter.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage. Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the cell coverage-based traffic map. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage. Step 7 Click OK. The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node. ----End


Creating a Traffic Map Based on User Location You can set the traffic based on user location.

Prerequisites Traffic parameters are configured.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


194



Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Create The Map Based on User Location. Step 5 Click Create Map to open the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box. Step 6 Set the traffic map parameters based on user location. For parameter description, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on User Locations. Step 7 Click OK. After the setting is complete, the traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node. ----End

3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group This section describes how to create a traffic simulation group. The U-Net calculates capacity simulation based on traffic simulation groups. Therefore, ensure that simulation groups are created and related parameters for the simulation calculation are set before performing the capacity simulation.

Prerequisites l


l


l

A calculation area has been created.

l

Traffic parameters have been set.

l

A traffic map has been configured.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Group Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set properties for the simulation group. For details, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Simulation Groups. Step 5 Determine whether to calculate the capacity simulation immediately.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


195



If you need to... Then... Calculate the 1. Select Calculate Now on the General tab page. capacity 2. Click OK. simulation immediately after the simulation group is created Calculate the Click OK. capacity After the simulation group is created, right-click it and choose Calculate simulation manually after from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-44. the simulation group is created

Figure 3-44 Calculate

NOTE

l The simulation group is automatically locked after the calculation is complete, as shown in Figure 3-45. l If you right-click the simulation group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu during the calculation, the simulation group will not be automatically locked. l The simulation group is automatically unlocked after its properties are modified. l You can right-click a certain simulation group and choose Group Locked from the shortcut menu to manually lock the simulation group. In this case, you need to manually unlock the simulation group before performing capacity simulation again.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


196



Figure 3-45 Group Locked

----End

Follow-up Procedure After the simulation group is created, you can set display properties of this group. 1.

In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.

2.


3.

Set the display color for each traffic status and determine whether to display the traffic status in the legend window.

3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result You can view the calculation result of capacity simulation in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an Entire Network You can view the capacity simulation results of each radio access system of the entire network after completing the capacity simulation calculation.

Prerequisites The capacity simulation calculation is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group. Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. The Group Results dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-46.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


197



Figure 3-46 Group Results

Step 4 View the capacity simulation statistics results for each radio access system in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire Network. ----End

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network This section describes how to view the capacity simulation result of an entire network, including the statistics in the entire network, sites, cells, and hot spots.


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT. Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of the entire network is displayed.. See Figure 3-47.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


198



Figure 3-47 Group Result

Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view statistics on the service requirements and the actual services in the entire network. For details, see Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page. NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation result of the specified hot spot. l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.

Step 5 On the Sites(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in the entire network. For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page. Step 6 On the Cells(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in the entire network. For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page. Step 7 Click Close. ----End


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites (Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively to filter the statistical results. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199



l

To export the simulation statistics on the sites and cells to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, choose Action > Export on the Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively.

l

To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page. Then, you can perform the coverage prediction based on the capacity simulation result. For detailed operations, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation Results.

Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot You can view the capacity simulation result in a single snapshot, including the statistics on the snapshot and corresponding sites, cells, users, and hot spots.


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of a single snapshot is displayed. Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view the statistics on the service requirements and actual services in a single snapshot. For details, see Parameters on the Statistics tab page. NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation result of the specified hot spot. l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.

Step 5 On the Sites tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in a single snapshot. For details, see Parameters on the Sites tab page. Step 6 On the Cells tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in a single snapshot. For details, see Parameters on the Cells tab page. Step 7 On the Mobiles tab page, view the simulation statistics on subscribers in a single snapshot. For details, see Parameters on the Mobiles tab page. NOTE

l You can also double-click a user icon on the map window to open the User Properties dialog box and view the simulation statistics of a single subscriber. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User. l Red indicates subscribers who are not satisfied with the network (offline, not connected, or no uplink coverage). Green indicates subscribers who are satisfied with the network.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


200



Step 8 Click Close. ----End


To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages to filter the statistical results.

l

To export the simulation statistics on the sites, cells, or subscribers to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, choose Action > Export on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages.

l

To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells tab page. Then, you can perform the prediction based on the capacity simulation result. For details, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation Results.

Querying Capacity Simulation Statistical Results on a Map After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the capacity simulation results in different legend colors on the map.

Prerequisites l

The capacity simulation calculation is complete.

l

U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, and mobility type.

l

U-Net can display different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on map.

Context

Procedure Step 1 Set legends and display properties of capacity simulation. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Symbol dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select the dimension for classifying the simulation users from the Field Type drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 3-48.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


201



Figure 3-48 Simulation Symbol

5.

Set the legend information for different types of simulation users, such as the shape and color. l Table 3-60 classifies the simulation users by user status. Table 3-60 Simulation users in different states State

Description

Satisfied

Users that are satisfied with the network quality, that is, users that are not in any of the following states: ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and Offline.

ULNoCover

Indicates the user that is not covered in the uplink direction.

DLNoCover

Indicates the user that is not covered in the downlink direction.

NoAccess

Indicates the user that is not accessed.

OffLine

Offline users.

l Table 3-61 classifies the simulation users by service type. Table 3-61 Simulation users of different service types

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Service

Description

LTEVideo Conferencing

Indicates the users corresponding to the video conferencing service.


202



Service

Description

LTEVoIP

Indicates the users corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEWeb Browsing

Indicates the users corresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEFTP

Indicates the users corresponding to the FTP service.

l Classify simulation users based on user attributes. l Classify simulation users based on user mobility rates. l Classify simulation users based on terminal types. NOTE

When simulation users are classified based on user attributes, mobility rates, service types, or terminal types, you can customize service types.

6.

Select Add to Legend. If the option is selected, the legend information is displayed in the Legend window.

7.

Click OK.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the checkbox before Simulations > A simulation group > Network System > A snapshot > User type. The map window displays the distribution of users in different states according to the preset legend shapes and colors in a map. NOTE

When you move the cursor pointer to a point representing a simulation user, a pop-up message is displayed, where you can query the detailed information about the simulation user.

Step 3 Query the legend information. Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed. ----End

Follow-up Procedure You can select an area by drawing a polygon and print the capacity simulation result of this area.

Querying Coverage Prediction Results in a PDF or CDF Chart After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the CDF or PDF charts of simulation counters by each simulation group. By checking the charts, you can know and analyze the capacity simulation results.

Prerequisites The capacity simulation calculation is complete. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


203



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT. Step 3 Choose Graphics Result from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a counter in the Item area and a display mode in the Figure Style area. The CDF or PDF chart corresponding to the selected counter is displayed in the right pane. NOTE

You can query the PDF or CDF chart of the following 21 counters: IoT(UL), IoT(DL), Load(UL), Load(DL), Cell MAC Throughput(UL), Cell MAC Throughput(DL), Application Throughput(UL), Application Throughput(DL), RS SINR(DL), Geometry, User MAC Throughput(UL), User MAC Throughput(DL), User Application Throughput(UL), User Application Throughput(DL), User Service Time(UL), User Service Time (DL), User Actual Power, Cell Actual Power, PUSCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, and Throughput.

----End


To save a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu.

l

To print a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu.

l

To copy a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.

l

To export the statistical results of a PDF or CDF chart as a .txt file, click Export Data.

Analyzing Capacity Simulation Results by Using the Point Analysis Function The point analysis function is mainly used to analyze the signal status at a point. After selecting a terminal or service, you can learn about the signal quality, signal strength, and uplink or downlink status of a certain point based on the capacity simulation results.




Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field. Step 3 Click a point on the map. The point changes to


the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


cursor. 204



Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, check the list of cells that can receive signals, strength of received signals, and uplink or downlink status of the selected position based on the capacity simulation results. l In Simulation Group, select a capacity simulation group to simulate the uplink load and downlink power of the network. l In Terminal, select a terminal type. l In Service, select a service type. l In Mobility, select a mobility type. The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reference Signal Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map. The uplink and downlink status of the selected point is displayed on the right of the tab page. l The

icon indicates that the current channel meets the demodulation requirements.

l The

icon indicates that the current channel does not meet the demodulation requirements.

Double-click the two icons, you can query the detailed link information. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window. ----End

Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation Results If capacity simulation is not conducted, the U-Net performs prediction based on the preset parameters of the cells. If capacity simulation is conducted, you can apply the capacity simulation results to NEs and the U-Net performs prediction based on the capacity simulation results In this case, the prediction considers the actual transmit power, load, and interference of the NEs. Therefore, the prediction results are more accurate.


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT. Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of the entire network is displayed. Step 4 To apply the simulation results to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page. Step 5 Perform the prediction by referring to LTE-FDD Prediction. ----End

3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can export the capacity simulation results of the entire network, a snapshot, or all simulation groups. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


205



Procedure l

l

l

Export capacity simulation results of all simulation groups 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.

3.

Choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the Path area of the displayed dialog box, click Browse, and select a path.

5.

Select Simulation in Select Export Content to export the capacity simulation results.

6.

Select the export objects in Simulation.

7.

Click Export.

Export capacity simulation results of the entire network 1.


2.


3.

Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu.

4.

Select Cells(Average) tab page.

5.

Click Action.

6.

Select Export.

7.

After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.

Export capacity simulation results of a snapshot 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot.

3.


4.

Select Cells tab page.

5.

Click Action.

6.

Select Export.

7.

After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.

----End

3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation This section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD capacity simulation by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Environments This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on environments or modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic maps in the New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Traffic Map Name

Indicates the name of a traffic map created according to the environment.


206



Parameter

Description

Polygon regions

Indicates all created polygons.

Add

Adds a selected polygon to the environment list.

Polygon regions in the list

Indicates an added polygon.

Environments in the list

Indicates the environment type corresponding a polygon.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Vectors This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on vectors or modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic maps in the Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box. Table 3-62 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a traffic map created based on vectors.

Table 3-63 Parameters on the Vector tab page Parameter

Description

Add

Adds a vector object. You can click Add and select a vector object to be added in the displayed Select Vector dialog box.

Delete

Deletes a vector object.

Name

Name of an added vector object.

Density

User density on a vector object.

Table 3-64 Parameters on the Traffic tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

User Profile

User type.

Mobility

Mobility type.


207



Parameter

Description

Density

User density. NOTE The value of this parameter determines the user density on the Vector tab page.

ID

Number of a clutter type.

Clutter Class

Name of a clutter type.

Weight

Weight of a clutter type. This parameter is displayed when clutter layer data is provided.

% Indoor

Percentage of indoor users for a clutter type. Number of indoor users for a clutter type = Percentage of indoor users x Total number of users for the clutter type.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on cell coverage or modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic maps in the New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box. Table 3-65 Parameters on the General tab page and Transceiver tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Name

Indicates the name of a traffic map created according to cell coverage.

Prediction Group

Selects a prediction group.

Generate user number based on Poisson

Indicates whether to generate a user map based on Poisson distribution.

Users Per Service

Sets the number of users corresponding to each service type for each cell.

Tx_ID

Indicates the name of a cell.

LTEFTP(UL)

Indicates the number of uplink users corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEFTP(DL)

Indicates the number of downlink users corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEVideo Conferencing(UL)

Indicates the number of uplink users corresponding to the video conferencing service.


208



Parameter

Description

LTEVideo Conferencing(DL)

Indicates the number of downlink users corresponding to the video conferencing service.

LTEVoIP(UL)

Indicates the number of uplink users corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEVoIP(DL)

Indicates the number of downlink users corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEWeb Browsing(UL)

Indicates the number of uplink users corresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEWeb Browsing(DL)

Indicates the number of downlink users corresponding to the Web browsing service.

Table 3-66 Parameters on the Traffic tab page Parameter

Description

Terminals area-Terminal


Terminals area-%

Indicates the percentage of users corresponding to each terminal type. Number of users corresponding to a terminal type = Percentage of the users corresponding to the terminal type x Total number of users

Mobility area-Mobility


Mobility area-%

Indicates the percentage of users corresponding to each mobility type. Number of users corresponding to a mobility type = Percentage of the users corresponding to the mobility type x Total number of users

Clutters area-ID

Indicates the number of a clutter class.

Clutters area-Clutter Class


Clutters area-% Indoor

Indicates the percentage of indoor users corresponding to a clutter class. Number of indoor users corresponding to a clutter class = Percentage of indoor users x Total number of users corresponding to the clutter class

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on User Locations This section describes the parameters for creating a traffic map based on user locations or modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating a Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


209



traffic map in the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box or modifying parameters for an existing traffic map based on user locations. Parameter

Description

Genera l tab page

User Location Traffic Map Name

Indicates the name of a traffic map based on user locations.

User Locati on tab page

Use as X and Y

Indicates that the geodetic coordinates are used.

Use as Longitude and Latitude

Indicates that the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates are used.

Import

You can import files if user data files are available. To import a user data file successfully, ensure that the column headings of the user data file match the fields such as UserID and coordinates on the U-Net.

UserID

Indicates the ID of a user.

X

Indicates the X coordinate.

Y

Indicates the Y coordinate.

Longitude

Indicates the longitude.

Latitude

Indicates the latitude.

Priority

Indicates a priority. The value is an integer. The larger the value, the higher the priority.

Service

Indicates a service type. l The service type must be defined in the traffic parameters. l For details about service types in an LTE-FDD network, see 3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types. l For details about service types in an LTE-TDD network, see 4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types.

Terminal

Indicates a terminal type. l The terminal type must be defined in the traffic parameters. l For details about terminal types in an LTEFDD network, see 3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types. l For details about terminal types in an LTETDD network, see 4.6.4 Setting the LTETDD Terminal Type.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


210



Parameter

Description

Mobility

Indicates a mobility type. l The mobility type must be defined in the traffic parameters. l For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

LinkType

Indicates the uplink or downlink type.

IsIndoor

Indicate whether the user is indoor user. The value can be True or False.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Simulation Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a traffic simulation group. You can refer to this section when creating a traffic simulation group in the Simulation Group Properties dialog box or in the corresponding attribute dialog box. Table 3-67 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a traffic simulation group.

Site Corr

Shadow fading factor on the base station side.

UL FSS Environment

Gain table used for modifying the UL frequency selection gain.

Number of Simulations

Number of simulations. A larger number of simulations indicates a more precise simulation result, but a longer time is required for calculation.

Calculate Now

Whether to perform simulation calculation immediately.

Table 3-68 Parameters on the Source Traffic tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Select Traffic Maps to be Used

Traffic map.

Select Polygon

Calculation area.


211



Table 3-69 Parameters on the Advance tab page Parameter

Description

Number of TTI

Number of transmission time intervals (TTIs). The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain instantaneous network information by TTI. A larger number of TTIs indicates a more precise simulation result, but a longer time is required for calculation.

UL IoT Convergence Threshold

Uplink IoT convergence threshold used for checking whether a network is converged.

DL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%)

Downlink throughput convergence threshold used for checking whether a network is converged.

UL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%)

Uplink throughput convergence threshold used for checking whether a network is converged.

DL Load Convergence Threshold(%)

Downlink load convergence threshold used for checking whether a network is converged.

UL Load Convergence Threshold(%)

Uplink load convergence threshold used for checking whether a network is converged.

Edge User Ratio (%)

Ratio of cell edge users used for calculating the number of cell edge users.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire Network This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entire network.

Parameters on the LTE Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

NetVersion

Indicates the network technology.

FailedSingleModeUserCount

Indicates the number of single-mode users who fail to access the network.

SuccessSingleModeUserCount

Indicates the number of single-mode users who successfully access the network.

SingleModeUserCount

Indicates the number of single-mode users.

SuccessMultiModeUserCount

Indicates the number of multi-mode users who successfully access the network.


212



Parameter

Description

Load(UL)

Indicates the uplink load.

Load(DL)

Indicates the downlink load.

Throughput(UL)(Kbps)

Indicates the uplink throughput of the entire network.

Throughput(DL)(Kbps)

Indicates the downlink throughput of the entire network.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entire network.

Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page

CAUTION l The Request pane lists the total number of users attempted to access and the relevant throughput, and the number of users attempted to access for each service and the relevant throughput. l The Result pane lists the total number of actually accessed users and the actual throughput, and the number of actually accessed users for each service and the relevant throughput. l If the throughput is less than 1 MB, the unit is kbit/s. If the throughput is greater than or equal to 1 MB, the unit is Mbit/s. Parameter

Description

Requ est area

Number of transmission time intervals (TTIs).

Number of TTI

The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain instantaneous network information by TTI. A larger number of TTIs indicates a more precise simulation result, but a longer time is required for calculation. Total Users Trying to Connect

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Average Users


Indicates the average total number of users attempting to gain access to the network. 213



Parameter

Description

LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/ LTEWeb Browsing/ LTEVideo Conferencing NOTE The system collects the number of users attempted to access and relevant throughput for services such as LTEFTP, LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb Browsing. This section generally describes theses parameters because they are the same for all services.

Standard Deviation

Indicates the standard deviation.

Average Throughput Demand(DL)

Indicates the average required downlink throughput on the entire network.

Average Throughput Demand(UL)

Indicates the average required uplink throughput on the entire network.

Users

Indicates the number of users attempting to gain access to each service.

Uplink

Indicates the number of uplink users attempting to gain access to each service.

Downlink

Indicates the number of downlink users attempting to gain access to each service.

Max Throughput Demand Indicates the maximum (UL) uplink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network. Min Throughput Demand (UL)

Indicates the minimum uplink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network.


Indicates the average uplink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network.

Max Throughput Demand Indicates the maximum (DL) downlink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network. Min Throughput Demand (DL)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Indicates the minimum downlink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network.

214



Parameter

Resul ts area

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description

Total Connected Users


Indicates the average downlink throughput of each service required for users on the entire network.

Average Users

Indicates the average total number and percentage of users that actually gain access to the entire network.

Actual MAC Throughput (UL)

Indicates the actual average throughput at the MAC layer for uplink users on the entire network.

Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual average throughput at the MAC layer for uplink users on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput(UL)

Indicates the actual average throughput at the application layer for uplink users on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual average throughput at the application layer for uplink users on the entire network.

Actual MAC Throughput (DL)

Indicates the actual average throughput at the MAC layer for downlink users on the entire network.

Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual average throughput at the MAC layer for downlink users on the entire network.


215



Parameter

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description Actual Application Throughput(DL)

Indicates the actual average throughput at the application layer for downlink users on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual average throughput at the application layer for downlink users on the entire network.

Breakdown per service: LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/ LTEWeb Browsing// LTEVideo Conferencing

Service User

Indicates the number and percentage of users that successfully gain access to each service.

NOTE The system collects the number of accessed users and relevant throughput for services such as LTEFTP, LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb Browsing. This section generally describes theses parameters because they are the same for all services.

Downlink

Indicates the number of downlink users that gain access to each service.

Downlink Standard Deviation

Indicates the standard deviation of the downlink users that gain access to each service.

Uplink

Indicates the number of uplink users that gain access to each service.

Uplink Standard Deviation

Indicates the standard deviation of the uplink users that gain access to each service.

Offline User

Indicates the number and percentage of offline users corresponding to each service.

Failed User

Indicates the number and percentage of failed users corresponding to each service.


Indicates the actual throughput at the MAC layer for uplink users of each service on the entire network.


216



Parameter

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual throughput at the MAC layer for uplink users of each service on the entire network.


Indicates the actual throughput at the application layer for uplink users of each service on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual throughput at the application layer for uplink users of each service on the entire network.


Indicates the actual throughput at the MAC layer for downlink users of each service on the entire network.

Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual throughput at the MAC layer for downlink users of each service on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput(DL)

Indicates the actual throughput at the application layer for downlink users of each service on the entire network.

Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standard deviation of the actual throughput at the application layer for downlink users of each service on the entire network.


217



Parameter

Description

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL)

For the entire network, this parameter is the statistical throughput at the MAC layer for uplink edge users. The value of this parameter for the entire network is the average statistical throughput at the MAC layer for uplink edge users in multiple snapshots.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL)

For the entire network, this parameter is the statistical throughput at the MAC layer for downlink edge users. The value of this parameter for the entire network is the average statistical throughput at the MAC layer for downlink edge users in multiple snapshots.

Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Site

Indicates a site name.

Total MAC Throughput (UL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of a site.

Total Application Throughput(UL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the uplink of a site.

Total MAC Throughput (DL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of a site.

Total Application Throughput(DL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the downlink of a site.

LTEFTP(UL MAC) (kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the FTP service at a site.

LTEFTP(UL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink of the FTP service at a site.

LTEFTP(DL MAC) (kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the FTP service at a site.


218



Parameter

Description

LTEFTP(DL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlink of the FTP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(UL MAC) (kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the VoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(UL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink of the VoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(DL MAC) (kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the VoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(DL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlink of the VoIP service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(UL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(UL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink of the Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(DL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(DL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlink of the Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing (UL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the Video Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing (UL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink of the Video Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing (DL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the Video Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing (DL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlink of the Video Conferencing service at a site.

Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Site

Indicates a site name.

Transceiver

Indicates a transceiver name.

Cell

Indicates a cell name.

Tx Power(dBm)

Indicates the TX power for a cell. The unit is dBm.

IoT(UL)(dB)

Indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the noise on the uplink of a cell. The unit is dB.


219



Parameter

Description

Load(UL)

Indicates the cell uplink load. Uplink load = Overhead of traffic channels/(System bandwidth Overhead of the control channel)

Average Used RB(UL)

Indicates the number of uplink RBs in use for a cell. Number of RBs used in the uplink direction = Overhead of traffic channels + Overhead of the control channel

Load(DL)

Indicates the cell downlink load. Downlink load = Overhead of traffic channels/System bandwidth

Average Used RB(DL)

Indicates the number of downlink RBs in use for a cell. Number of downlink RBs in use = Total number of RBs within the bandwidth x Downlink load

MAC Throughput(UL) (kbps)

Indicates the uplink average throughput at the MAC layer for a cell.

Application Throughput (UL)(kbps)

Indicates the uplink average throughput at the application layer for a cell.

MAC Throughput(DL) (kbps)

Indicates the downlink average throughput at the MAC layer for a cell.

Application Throughput (DL)(kbps)

Indicates the downlink average throughput at the application layer for a cell.

Service User

Indicates the number of users that can gain access to cell services.

Offline User

Indicates the number of users involved in call drops in a cell.

Parameters for Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot This section describes the parameters for viewing the capacity simulation result in a single snapshot. You can refer to this section when viewing the capacity simulation result in the XXX Properties dialog box.

Parameters on the Statistics tab page Parameter Reque st area

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description

Total Users Trying to Connect

Users

Total number of subscribers attempting to gain access in a single snapshot.

Downlink

Number of downlink subscribers attempting to gain access to services in a single snapshot.


220



Parameter

Description

Breakdown per service LTEFTP/ LTEVoIP/ LTEWeb Browsing/ LTEVideo Conferencing

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Uplink

Number of uplink subscribers attempting to gain access to services in a single snapshot.

Max Throughput Demand(DL)

Maximum throughput required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Min Throughput Demand (DL)

Minimum throughput required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Max Throughput Demand(UL)

Maximum throughput required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Min Throughput Demand (UL)

Minimum throughput required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Users

Number of subscribers attempting to gain access to each service in a single snapshot.

Downlink

Number of downlink subscribers attempting to gain access to each service in a single snapshot.

Uplink

Number of uplink subscribers attempting to gain access to each service in a single snapshot.

Max Throughput Demand(DL)

Maximum throughput of each service required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Min Throughput Demand (DL)

Minimum throughput of each service required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput of each service required by downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


221



Parameter

Description

NOTE The system collects the number of subscribers attempting to gain access and relevant throughput for services such as LTEFTP, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb Browsing, and LTEVideo Conferencing respectively. This section generally describes theses parameters because they are the same for all services.

Result area

Max Throughput Demand(UL)

Maximum throughput of each service required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Min Throughput Demand (UL)

Minimum throughput of each service required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput of each service required by uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Number of TTI

Number of TTIs when the calculation within a snapshot is complete. The U-Net adopts the semidynamic simulation to obtain instantaneous network information by TTI. A larger number of TTIs indicates a more precise simulation result, but a longer time is required for calculation.

Stat Start Time

TTI at which statistics starts.

IsConvergence

Whether a snapshot is converged.

Total Connected Users

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Users

Average total number and percentage of subscribers that actually gain access to services in a single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on the MAC layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on the application layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on the MAC layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.


222



Parameter

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description Actual Application Throughput(UL)

Actual average throughput on the application layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Breakdown per service: LTEFTP/ LTEVoIP/ LTEWeb Browsing/ LTEVideo Conferencing

Users

Number and percentage of subscribers that successfully gain access to each service in a single snapshot.

Downlink

Number of downlink subscribers that gain access to each service in a single snapshot.

NOTE The system collects the number of accessed subscribers and relevant throughput for services such as LTEFTP, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb Browsing, and LTEVideo Conferencing respectively. This section generally describes theses parameters because they are the same for all services.

Uplink

Number of uplink subscribers that gain access to each service in a single snapshot.


Actual throughput of each service on the MAC layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Standard Deviation

Standard deviation of each service on the MAC layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual throughput of each service on the application layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Standard Deviation

Standard deviation of each service on the application layer for downlink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual throughput of each service on the MAC layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

Standard Deviation

Standard deviation of each service on the MAC layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual throughput of each service on the application layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.


223



Parameter

Description

Breakdown per unsuccessful reason

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Standard Deviation

Standard deviation of each service on the application layer for uplink subscribers in a single snapshot.

DLNoCover User

Number of subscribers that are not covered in the downlink direction.

ULNoCover User

Number of subscribers that are not covered in the uplink direction.

NoAccess User

Number of subscribers that fail to gain access to services.

Offline User

Number of subscribers involved in call drops.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL)

Statistical throughput on the MAC layer for uplink cell edge subscribers. The value of this parameter for a single snapshot is the first top 5% throughput among all throughput ranked in ascending order on the MAC layer for all uplink subscribers in the snapshot.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL)

Statistical throughput on the MAC layer for downlink cell edge subscribers. The value of this parameter for a single snapshot is the first top 5% throughput among all throughput ranked in ascending order on the MAC layer for all downlink subscribers in the snapshot.

User Throughput Distribution

Distribution of user throughput in a single snapshot.

User DL RS SINR Distribution

Distribution of downlink RS SINR.

User PDSCH SINR Distribution

Distribution of downlink PDSCH SINR.


224



Parameters on the Sites tab page The parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab page for the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the whole network.. For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.

Parameters on the Cells tab page The parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab page for the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the whole network.. For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.

Parameters on the Mobiles tab page Parameter

Description

ID

ID of a user.

X

The x-coordinate of a user on the map.

Y

The y-coordinate of a user on the map.

Group Name

Name of a simulation group.

SnapShot Name

Name of a snapshot.

User Profile

User type.

Service

Service type.

Terminal

Terminal type.

Mobility

Mobility type.

Connection State

Connection status. There are five user states: Satisfied, ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and OffLine.

Best Server

The best serving cell. After load control is performed, the value of BestServer changes.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Link Type

Link type (uplink and downlink).

Indoor

Whether the terminal is used indoors.

Link Loss(UL)(dB)

Uplink link loss.

Link Loss(DL)(dB)

Downlink link loss.

RSRP(UL)(dBm)

Uplink reference signal received power.

RSRP(DL)(dBm)

Downlink reference signal received power.


225



Parameter

Description

IoT(DL)(dB)

Downlink interference over thermal. The unit is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.

PDSCH MCS

Downlink modulation coding scheme (MCS).

PUSCH MCS

Uplink MCS.

MIMO Mode

Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) type.

Tx Power(dBm)

Transmit power of a terminal. The downlink user is empty.

PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PUSCH channel on the MAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PDSCH channel on the MAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PUSCH channel on the application layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PDSCH channel on the application layer. The unit is kbit/s.

Average Used RB Number

Average number of used RBs.

RS SINR(DL)(dB)

Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.

PUSCH SINR(dB)

SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.

PDSCH SINR(dB)

SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of a single user.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Layer

Snapshot location of a user.

ID

ID of a user.

X

The x-coordinate of a user on the map.

Y

The y-coordinate of a user on the map.

Link Type

Link type (uplink and downlink). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226



Parameter

Description

Indoor

Whether the terminal is used indoors.

Mobility

Mobility type.

Service

Service type.

Terminal

Terminal type.

Best Server

The best serving cell. After load control is performed, the value of BestServer changes.

Link Loss(UL)(dB)

Uplink link loss.

Link Loss(DL)(dB)

Downlink link loss.

RSRP(UL)(dBm)

Uplink reference signal received power.

RSRP(DL)(dBm)

Downlink reference signal received power.

IoT(DL)(dB)

Downlink interference over thermal. The unit is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.

PDSCH MCS

Downlink modulation coding scheme (MCS).

PUSCH MCS

Uplink MCS.

MIMO Mode

Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) type.

Tx Power(dBm)

Transmit power of a terminal. The downlink user is empty.

PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PUSCH channel on the MAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PDSCH channel on the MAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PUSCH channel on the application layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

Throughput of the PDSCH channel on the application layer. The unit is kbit/s.

RS SINR(DL)(dB)

Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

PUSCH SINR(dB)

SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.

PDSCH SINR(dB)

SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.


227



Parameters for Viewing Point Analysis Statistics This section describes the parameters for viewing point analysis statistics. You can refer to this section when viewing the detailed information about propagation models in the Model Details window, detailed information about the link budget in the Link Budget window, or analysis results of uplink and downlink signals in the Analysis Detail window.

Parameter Description of the Model Details Window The following parameters are valid only when the propagation model is SPM. Parameter

Description

Number Pts

Indicates the number of Bin points involved in the statistics.

Dist.

Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.

Alt.

Indicates the altitude of a point.

Tot.H.

Indicates the total height of a point.

Clut.

Indicates the clutter ID of a point.

Effective Tx Height

Indicates the effective antenna height of the transmitter.

Receiver Height

Indicates the receiver height of a point.

Antenna Gain


Diffraction Loss

Indicates the diffraction loss.

Effective Rx Height

Indicates the effective antenna height of the receiver.

Clutter Loss

Indicates the clutter loss.

NOTE

Some parameters in the Model Details window are not described in this table. They are calculated according to the propagation model.

Parameter Description of the Link Budget Window

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Transceiver


Receiver

Indicates the coordinates of a point.

Distance

Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.

Max Power

Indicates the maximum transmit power of the carrier.

Reference Signal Power

Indicates the power of a single reference signal of the carrier.


228



Parameter

Description

Path Loss

Indicates the path loss.

Shadow Fading Margin

Indicates the margin of shadow fading.

Penetration Loss

Indicates the penetration loss.

Equipment Loss

Indicates the equipment loss on the base station side, including the feeder loss, jumper loss, and TMA loss.

Reference Signal Level

Indicates the strength of the reference signal.

Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window Parameter

Description

Down link

Received Reference Signal Level

Indicates the strength of the reference signal received by the terminal.

PDSCH Total Noise(I +N)

Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the terminal and the noise power of the terminal.

Reference Signal C/(I +N)

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the reference signal.

PDSCH C/(I+N)

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the downlink traffic channel.

Bearer

Indicates the modulation and demodulation mode used by the terminal.

PDSCH Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink traffic channel.

Received PUSCH Power

Indicates the strength of the signal received by the cell.

Transmission Power

Indicates the transmit power of the terminal.

PUSCH Total Noise(I +N)

Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the cell and the noise power of the cell.

PUSCH C/(I+N)

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink traffic channel.

Bearer

Indicates the demodulation and modulation mode used by the cell.

PUSCH Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink traffic channel.

Uplin k

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


229



3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network through the U-Net.

3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning The physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs is unavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the system to automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planning is complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.

Basic Knowledge of PCI Planning In PCI planning, the U-Net assigns proper IDs to cells. This ensures that no interference is generated between the downlink signals of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells and terminals can properly synchronize and decode the pilot channels of normal serving cells. The PCI planning function can be used to create and expand networks.

Principles In LTE-FDD mode, you can search for cells according to cell groups. That is, you can determine the ID of the corresponding cell group based on the SSCH and determine the specific cell ID based on the PSCH. Considering the networking capability, a large number of cell IDs is preferred. In the case of a large number of cell IDs, sufficient and high-performance SCHs are required to support quick and accurate query of cell IDs. Therefore, in LTE-FDD mode, each cell ID group consists of three cell IDs. Therefore, the number of cell IDs is a multiple of 3. The number of downlink scrambling codes is a multiple of 6. In the case of the WCDMA network, the maximum number of cell IDs is 512. Therefore, to ensure that the number of cell IDs is a multiple of both 3 and 6, the recommended number of cell IDs is 504. The number of PCIs is limited. Therefore, in the actual network, PCI reuse is unavoidable. The reuse of PCIs, however, may result in interference when the distance between the cells sharing the same PCI is excessively small. By using the PCI planning function on the U-Net, you can plan PCIs properly for cells, reducing the interference between intra-frequency and co-PCI cells.

Layer-0 Base Station This section introduces the definition of layer-0 base station based on the schematic diagram in Figure 3-49.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


230



Figure 3-49 Schematic diagram of layer-0 base station

In the circle, the line between base station A and base station B, that is, line AB, is the diameter. Line DG and line EF run parallel with line AB. The length of either line OD or OE is one third of the length of line AB. The number of base stations involved in the gray area represents the number of layers between base station A and base station B. If no base station is involved in the gray area, base station A and base station B are called layer-0 base stations.

Mode 3 and Mode 6 l

When the PCIs of cells are divided by 6 and the remainders are the same, these cells have the same mode 6. For example, the PCI of cell A is 16 and the PCI of cell B is 10; the remainder of dividing 16 by 6 is 4 and the remainder of dividing 10 by 6 is also 4. Therefore, cell A and cell B have the same mode 6.

l

When the PCIs of cells are divided by 3 and the remainders are the same, these cells have the same mode 3. For example, the PCI of cell A is 8 and the PCI of cell B is 5; the remainder of dividing 8 by 3 is 2 and the remainder of dividing 5 by 3 is also 2. Therefore, cell A and cell B have the same mode 3.

Planning PCIs The U-Net provides the function of planning PCIs. The planning results can be applied to the cells.

Prerequisites A base station is created.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: View the PCIs of existing cells. 1. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231



2.

In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.

3.

Right-click and choose Open PCI Codes from the shortcut menu. The PCI Planning Display window is displayed. View the PCIs of existing cells.

Step 2 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning. Step 4 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-50. Figure 3-50 Automatic Allocation

Step 5 In the LTE PCI Planning dialog box, set the planning parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters for Planning PCIs. Step 6 Select whether to expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs. If...

Then...

Expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs.

Click Load to import the existing PCI cluster configuration file of the network.

Replan all the PCIs.

Perform Step 7.

Step 7 Click Run. l During planning, you can right-click LTE PCI Planning on the Operation tab page of the explorer window, and then choose Stop PCI Codes Planning from the shortcut menu to stop the PCI planning. l The planning result is displayed at the lower-part of the U-Net main interface. For parameter description, see Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning Results. ----End

Follow-up Procedure After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, verify, apply, and export the PCI planning result. For details, see Managing the PCI Planning Result.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


232



Managing the PCI Planning Result This section describes how to manage PCI planning result. After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, and export the PCI planning result.

Prerequisites The PCI planning is complete.

Procedure l


Then...

You want to filter PCI planning result

1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Filter from the shortcut menu. For details, see Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results. 2. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green on the map, as shown in Figure 3-51. NOTE l You need to select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree so that the filtered cells can be displayed in green in the map window. l If you click None in the Filter dialog box or close the PCI Planning Display window, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.

You want to remove the filter effect on the PCI planning result

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The PCI Planning Display window switches back to the state when no filter criterion was used, and the color of cells is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.

You want to Audit the PCI planning result

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. For details, see Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results. The audit result is saved as an .xls file.

You want to apply the PCI planning result to each cell

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Commit from the shortcut menu. PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning result is applied.

You want to export the PCI planning result

1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Export Result from the shortcut menu. 2. Set parameters in the Data Export dialog box. For details, see 10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data. 3. Click Export to export the planning result.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


233



If...

Then...

You want to view the PCI values of cells in the map window

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. 4. In the displayed dialog box, add the PCI field to the Selected Fields area. 5. Click OK. The PCI values of cells will be displayed in the map window. PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning result is applied.

You want to enable the map window to display the PCI planning result together with that in the planning result table

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. 2. Select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree. 3. In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning. 4. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu. 5. Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties. 6. Click OK. 7. Select a source cell in the map window or click a row heading in the planning result table. The PCI planning result is displayed in the map window and planning result table at the same time.

You want to manually modify PCI configurations

In the PCI Planning Display window, manually modify the value of Confirm Code. Then, right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and choose Commit from the shortcut menu. 1. Select a transceiver in the map window. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed dialog box, manually modify the PCI configurations on the LTE-FDDCell tab page.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


234



Figure 3-51 Filter

----End

3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning To ensure successful random access to an LTE-FDD network, you must plan the physical random access channel (PRACH) of each cell on the LTE-FDD network. The planning of PRACHs involves the planning of the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC).

Basic Knowledge of PRACHs The PRACH planning is also called the ZC sequence planning. During the planning of ZC sequences, proper preamble sequences are assigned to cells to ensure that the high-speed cells or cells with larger radius can be configured with high-performance preamble sequences. Currently, the U-Net supports the PRACH planning of only co-channel cells.

Planning of ZC Sequence Indexes The PRACH uses the ZC sequence as the root sequence. The number of preamble sequences of each cell is 64. The preamble sequences are generated through cyclic shifts (Ncs, CyclicShifts) of ZC sequences. Preamble sequences used by a UE are allocated by a base station or randomly selected. To reduce the interference of preamble sequences between adjacent cells, you need to plan ZC sequence indexes properly. In LTE FDD mode, the number of ZC sequence indexes is 838, and 16 types of Ncs values are available. The U-Net configures ZC sequence indexes and Ncs values for multiple cells according to the cell properties (such as the cell radius and high speed cell) to ensure that the generated preamble sequences of adjacent cells are different. Thus, the interference caused by the use of the same preamble sequence between adjacent cells is reduced.

Planning PRACH You can manually plan the PRACH parameters of one or multiple cells. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


235



Prerequisites A base station is created.

Procedure Step 1 Set Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) for each cell. The default value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) is 2 for each cell. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Change the value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor).

5.

Click OK.

Step 2 Importing the existing neighboring relationships. For details, see Importing Neighbor Relationships. Step 3 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PRACH Planning. Step 5 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 6 Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Planning the PRACH. Step 7 Click Run. The planning results of the PRACH parameters are displayed in a pane under the U-Net main interface. You can check the planning results. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing PRACH Planning Results. ----End

Follow-up Procedure If you need to...

Then...

Apply the PRACH planning results

Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box and choose Commit from the shortcut menu to apply the PRACH planning results. The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is submitted. The value of Min Root Sequence Index is updated after the PRACH planning results are submitted.

Export the PRACH planning results

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the PRACH planning results.


236



If you need to...

Then...

Modify the PRACH configurations manually

In the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box, modify the value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index in the table manually. The U-Net will automatically change the value of Confirmed End Root Sequence Index.

The PRACH planning results are displayed in the map window.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. 4. In the displayed dialog box, add the Min Root Sequence Index field to the Selected Fields area.

The cells using PRACH reuse are displayed in the map window.

1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of LTE PRACH Planning.

Modify the value of Min Root Sequence Index.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.

2. Select a cell in the map window or click the head of a row in the planning result table. The selected cell and the cells using PRACH reuse with the selected cell are displayed in the same color on the map.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. 3. Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu. 4. Modify the value of Min Root Sequence Index. NOTE l If you have planned the PRACH parameters of the cell but the planning results are not submitted, the modification of Min Root Sequence Index will be synchronized to Existed Min Root Sequence Index but not to Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index. l The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is submitted when you submit the PRACH planning results.

3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning After creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.

Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


237



Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l

If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.

l

If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell.

l

The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.

l

Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighbor relationship.

The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms: l

Topology: algorithm based on topology

l

Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction

l

Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction. If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on topology.

Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the following scenarios: l

6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network

l

6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network

l

6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network

l

6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration NOTE

For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring cells.

Importing Neighbor Relationships This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.

Prerequisites l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238



l

The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor relationships.

l

Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched by cell name.

l

Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.

l

Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network technology.

Context

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighbor relationships are imported. NOTE

Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.

Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file. Step 6 Click OK. ----End

Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring Cells The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.

Prerequisites l

Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

l

In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported into the U-Net.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


239



Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-52. Figure 3-52 Neighbor Automatic Allocation

Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells. Step 5 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End


l

Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.

3.

Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.

5.

Click OK.

You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details, see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.

Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


240



Prerequisites The neighboring cell planning is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE

You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.

Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...

Then...

View neighboring cell relationships

In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown in Figure 3-53. The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window simultaneously.

Filter neighboring cells

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 3-54. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.

Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells

Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.

Audit neighboring cell relationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


241



If you need to...

Then...

Apply the result of neighboring cell planning to each cell

In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from the shortcut menu..

Export the result of neighboring cell planning

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu..

After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the original neighboring cell relationships are updated.

2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.

Delete neighboring cell relationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane.

Modify neighboring cell relationships

1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm column of the table in the right pane is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is force in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


242



If you need to...

Then...

Export the X2 interface relationship data

This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network. The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the planning result is applied to each cell. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE. 2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship data needs to be exported. 4. Specify an export path. 5. Click OK.

Clear the result of neighboring cell planning

1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result of neighboring cell planning is cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


243



Figure 3-53 Clicking a cell in the map window

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


244



Figure 3-54 Filter

----End

3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning After base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, you can enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs for each cell.

Frequency Planning Basics An LTE-FDD broadband network does not have sufficient EARFCNs. However, it supports dense frequency reuse owning to its orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) features. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink six frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes.

LTE-FDD Network Frequency Planning The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink six frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. l

1x1+ICIC soft frequency reuse In this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse cluster to implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference between adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the fullfrequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.

l

1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band allocation reuse In this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse cluster to implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference between

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


245



adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the fullfrequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band. l

1x3 frequency reuse In this mode, the network uses three EARFCNs. The three cells in an eNodeB use different EARFCNs. An eNodeB and its three cells are used as a reuse cluster to implement seamless coverage of the entire network.

Planning EARFCNs The U-Net provides the automatic frequency planning function. You can enable the U-Net to automatically assign EARFCNs to each cell based on different frequency reuse modes to avoid improper frequency configuration, which greatly reduces the interference problems caused by improper frequency configuration.

Prerequisites The frequency band information is set.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.The Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


246



Figure 3-55 Parameter Setting

Step 4 On the General tab page, select the target area in Select Area. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases. Step 5 Set the minimum interference distance in Min Interference Distance(km). Step 6 Select a frequency reuse mode in Frequency Reuse Pattern. The default reuse mode is 1x1, Static ICIC. Step 7 On the Frequency tab page, select a band in Frequency Band and available ARFCNs in Channel Index. You can select only one ARFCN in 1x1 frequency reuse mode and three ARFCNs in 1x3 frequency reuse mode. Step 8 Click Run. After the frequency planning is complete, open the window of frequency planning results. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning Results. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


247




To export the frequency planning results, click Export in the window of frequency planning results.

l

To apply the frequency planning results to the cells, click Commit in the window of frequency planning results.

Checking the Information About Intra-Frequency Cells and Inter-Frequency Cells You can check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of a specified ARFCN or a specified cell. The intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells can be displayed in different colors in the map window on the U-Net.

Prerequisites A base station is deployed. ARFCNs are assigned to each cell under the base station.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning. Step 3 Choose Frequency Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Frequency Statistics dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set a band in Frequency Band and ARFCNs in Channel Index. Step 5 Click Find to check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of the specified ARFCN. Step 6 Click Geometry to query the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells on the map. Click Color to set the display colors of intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells. ----End

3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells The LTE cell automatic planning function is used to adjust the mechanical tilt angle, azimuth, and reference signal power of antennas on the network to meet user requirements. This avoids manual interventions and reduces repeated parameter adjustments. The purpose of this function is to improve the network coverage range, control and reduce intercell interference, and expand the network capacity, while ensuring signal receive quality. If the live network coverage does not meet requirements, you can enable this function to automatically adjust cell parameters to optimize the coverage.

Planning the Link Matrix Before optimizing cells, you need to calculate the link data of each cell to improve cell planning efficiency.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


248



Prerequisites l

Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been imported or created.

Procedure Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose Calculate LinkLoss Matrix from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-56. Figure 3-56 Calculate LinkLoss Matrix

Step 4 Set related parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. For details about parameters, see Setting Link Matrix Parameters. Step 5 Click Run to start calculating pass loss, as shown in Figure 3-57.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


249



Figure 3-57 Calculate

----End

Planning Cells This section describes how to plan cells. Before planning cells, you need to set parameters such as analysis and simulation areas, number of iteration times, weight of each coverage counter (such as RSRP and RS SINR), and maximum adjustment range of the antenna tilt angle, azimuth, and reference signal transmit power.

Prerequisites l

Base stations have been created.

l

Analysis and simulation areas have been created.

l

The link matrix planning is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


250



Figure 3-58 LTE Cell Planning

Step 4 Set cell planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Follow-up Procedure After creating an LTE cell planning group, you can plan LTE cells. 1.

In the browser window, click the Operation tab.

2.

Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.

3.

Right-click Groupx and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. The system starts planning LTE cells, as shown in Figure 3-59.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


251



Figure 3-59 Calculate LTE Cell Planning

NOTE

You can right-click Groupx and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating LTE cell groups. When LTE cells are being planned, the Event Viewer window in the lower part of the U-Net main window displays the planning progress.

After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result. For details, see Viewing the LTE Cell Planning Result.

Viewing the LTE Cell Planning Result After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result of each iteration and the planning result of the LTE cell parameters for each cell in each iteration. You can also compare the parameter values before and after the planning. In addition, you can view the planning result of each iteration in a line graph. The planning result can apply to actual cells.

Prerequisites l

Links have been calculated.

l

LTE cell planning groups have been created and calculated.

Procedure Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click Groupx and choose Result from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning: Groupx dialog box is displayed. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, view the LTE cell planning result, as shown in Figure 3-60. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


252



Figure 3-60 LTE Cell Planning: Groupx

NOTE

On the Cells tab page in the LTE Cell Planning :Groupx dialog box, click Commit to apply the cell planning result to each cell.

----End

3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD network parameter planning by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells This section describes parameters for planning neighboring LTE-FDD cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


253



Table 3-70 Parameters displayed on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Methods Select

Selects a network planning scenario. l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on the network topology. l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction results. This method is applicable only to outdoor base stations. l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on both the network topology and the prediction results.

Max Neighbor Distance(km)

Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance. If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.

Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbors

Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring relationships. If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.

Force Co-Site As Neighbor

Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m)

Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when the distance between the two cells is less than the value of this parameter.

Reference Existed Neighbors

Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existing cells.

Azimuth Difference (°)

Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned and the referenced cells.

Reference Site Distance(m)

Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned and the referenced cell.

Resolution(m)

Indicates the precision for the calculation. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Handover Area Percent(%)

Indicates the handover area proportion. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Compute Shadowing

Indicates whether to impose shadow fading. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


254



Parameter

Description

Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%)

Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is imposed. The value of the parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadow fading. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Compute Indoor Loss

Indicates whether to impose penetration loss. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Min Signal Level(dBm)

Indicates the minimum signal receive level. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Handover Threshold(dB)

Indicates the handover area threshold. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Area

Indicates the planning area. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.

Table 3-71 Parameters displayed on the Intra-Frequency tab page Parameter

Description

Max Neighbor Number of Indoor Cell

Indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells. This parameter is valid only when neighboring cells are planned based on network topology.

Max Neighbor Number of Outdoor Cell

Indicates the maximum number of outdoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Force Symmetry

Indicates whether to configure cells as bidirectional neighboring cells. If this option is selected during network capacity expansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the original neighboring relationship table.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


255



Table 3-72 Parameters displayed on the Inter-Frequency tab page Parameter

Description


Indicates the maximum number of indoor inter-frequency neighboring cells. This parameter is valid only when neighbor relationships are planned based on the topology.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Force Symmetry


Table 3-73 Parameters displayed on the Inter-RAT tab page (available in multi-mode) Parameter

Description

Co-Site Distance

Indicates the co-site distance. The default value is 30 km. If the distance between two base stations is less than or equal to the value of this parameter, the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-site cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-site cells only if the distances between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/ UMTS base station are less than or equal to the value of this parameter.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


CAUTION On the General tab page, if you select a network planning mode (Methods Select), the required conditions must be met so that you can use the cell as a neighboring LTE-FDD cell for blind handover. For details, see Table 3-74.

256



Parameter

Description

Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference

Indicates the co-transceiver azimuth difference. The default value is 5o. If the difference between the antenna azimuths of two cells is less than or equal to the co-transceiver azimuth difference, the two cells are considered as co-transceiver cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-transceiver cells only if the azimuth difference between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base station is less than or equal to the value of this parameter.

Min Signal Level (dBm)

Indicates the minimum signal receive level. The default value is –110 dBm. The signal receive level of the LTE-FDD cell must be less than the preset Min Signal Level(dBm) value.

Best Handover Area Percent

Indicates the best handover area proportion. The default value is 90%. On multi-mode networks, the LTE-FDD Best Server area may overlap the GSM/UMTS Best Server area. The ratio of the overlapped area to the LTE-FDD Best Server area is the handover area proportion. This value must be greater or equal to the preset Best Handover Area Percent.

SourceNetType

Indicates the system to which the source cell belongs.

To

Indicates the system to which the cell to be planned belongs. NOTE If the RAT is switched to UMTS, you can set the ARFCN to be handed over. If the RAT is switched to GSM, you can set the frequency band to be handed over.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Min Signal Level (dBm)

Indicates the minimum signal receive level of the inter-RAT neighboring cell.


Indicates the handover area threshold.

Max Number

Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.


257



Table 3-74 Conditions for blind neighboring LTE-FDD cell handover If you need to...

Then...

The Topology mode is selected

A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions: l Co-Site Distance l Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference l Min Signal Level(dBm)

The Prediction mode is selected

A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions: l Co-Site Distance l Best Handover Area Percent NOTE If there are repeaters, neighboring cell planning based on predictions is not supported.

The U-Net determines neighboring cells based on prediction. If the neighboring relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined based on prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring cells based on their topology relationships.

Topology + Prediction is selected

Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 3-75 Parameters on the General tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Display Links

Identifies neighboring relationships by lines.

Display Cell Color

Identifies neighboring relationships in cell colors.

Fit Neighbor Cell Visible

Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the map after you select the cell in the neighboring relationship table.

Selected Cell Color

Sets the color of the source cell.

Intra Frequency Neighbors

Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter Frequency Neighbors

Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors

Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Intra Technology Neighbors

Displays intra-Technology neighboring cells.


258



Table 3-76 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page Legend

Description

Intra Frequency

Sets the display color of intra-frequency unidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Inter Frequency

Sets the display color of inter-frequency unidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Inter-RAT

Sets the display color of inter-RAT unidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Intra Technology

Sets the display color of intra-technology unidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Paired Intra Frequency

Sets the display color of intra-frequency bidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Paired Inter Frequency

Sets the display color of inter-frequency bidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Paired Inter-RAT

Sets the display color of inter-RAT bidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Paired Intra Technology

Sets the display color of intra-technology bidirectional neighboring cells on the map.

Add To Legend

Displays the neighboring relationships on the map.

Transparency

Sets the transparency of the color.

NOTE

The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.

Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 3-77 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Source Cell

Selects the source cell.

Intra-Frequency

Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency

Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Intra-Technology

Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.


259



Parameter

Description

Inter-RAT

Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Average No.of Neighbors

Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.

Empty List

Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.

Missing Co-Site

Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.

Missing Symmetry

Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.

List > No:

Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are more than the specified value.

Percentage of Reference Neighbors

Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same site as the UMTS cells.

Same PCI

Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This parameter is available only for the LTE network.

None

Sets no filter criterion.

Highlighted on Geographic Interface

Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map or not.

This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.

Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 3-78 Tab page description Parameter

Description

Intra-Frequency

Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency

Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT

Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.

The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


260



Table 3-79 Parameter description Parameter

Description

Neighbor Name

Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Cause

Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships. Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.

Confirm

If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. Blind Handover

Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.

Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing LTE frequency planning results. You can refer to this section when viewing frequency planning results in the 1×1 Result and 1×3 Result dialog boxes. Parameter

Description

Site

Indicates the name of a site.

Transceiver

Indicates the name of a transmitter.

Frequency

Indicates the frequency band.

Bandwidth

Indicates the bandwidth.

1×1 Result dialog box

Edge Frequency (UL)

Indicates the allocation mode of the uplink edge frequency band. The value can be Style1, Style2, or Style3. NOTE When the downlink six edge frequency band allocation modes are used, the uplink edge frequency band mode has no output.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


261



Parameter

Description Edge Frequency (DL)

When Static ICIC is selected, the downlink three frequency band allocation modes are used. The value can be Style1, Style2, or Style3. When Adaptive ICIC is selected, the downlink six frequency band allocation modes are used. The value can be Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b.

1×3 Result dialog box

Channel Index

Indicates the ARFCN, which represents an offset of the frequency based on the current frequency band. For example, if the frequency band is 1800 MHz, the bandwidth is 20 MHz, and there are 10 ARFCNs, ARFCN 8 represents 1800 + 20 x 8 (MHz).

Parameters for Planning PCIs This section describes the parameters for automatically planning PCIs. You can refer to this section when planning PCIs in the LTE PCI Planning dialog box. Table 3-80 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Available PCI

Available PCIs. The value ranges from 0 to 503.

Planning With Exist PCI

Whether to conduct planning based on existing PCIs.

PCI Mod 3 Matching Azimuth order

Allocate PCI Mod 3 based on azimuth order.

Iteratively General PCI

Sets whether to generate PCIs by iterations. When this option is selected, the PCIs are allocated in the following manner when PCI allocation in a cell fails: The PCIs are allocated by reducing the reuse distance by iterations based on the steps as defined by Distance Descending Percentage(%).

Distance Descending Percentage(%)

Indicates the percentage of the step for reducing the PCI reuse distance.

Area

Indicates the PCI planning area.

Filter

l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


262



Table 3-81 Parameters on the Advanced Parameter tab page Parameter

Description

Topology

Select Topology to plan PCIs based on the network topology such as the cell location and antenna azimuth.

Prediction

Select Prediction to plan PCIs based on the prediction results such as cell coverage area. If the NE parameters are correctly configured, you are advised to plan PCIs based on the prediction results.

Resolution(m)

Indicates the coverage calculation precision. The default value is 50.


Indicates the threshold of minimum receive signal level.

Handover area threshold(dB)


Shadowing taken into account

Select Shadowing taken into account to take into account the shadow fading during the calculation of path loss.


Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%). This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is taken into account. The value of the parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing fading. Select Indoor Coverage to take into account indoor coverage during the calculation of path loss.

Indoor Coverage

Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing PCI planning results. Parameter

Description

Cell Name


Existing Code

Indicates the existing PCI value. Before you submit PCI results, the PCI value remains unchanged.

Suggest Code

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the suggested PCI value and also the planned PCI value. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263



Parameter

Description

Confirm Code

Indicates the confirmed PCI value. The default value of this parameter is equal to the planned PCI value. The value of this parameter can be changed manually. When you submit PCI planning results, the value of this parameter is submitted.

Min Reuse Distance(m)

Indicates the minimum reuse distance of PCI in the current line. No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.

Min Reuse Tier

Indicates the minimum reuse tier of PCI in the current line. No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.

Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing PCI planning results. Parameter

Description

Filter Target

Indicates the range of cells to be filtered. l All: all cells. l Planning: planned cells.

None

No condition is specified.

Reuse Tier <=

Indicates the maximum number of reuse layers.

Reuse Distance(km) <=

Indicates the maximum reuse distance.


Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the map or not.

Parameters for Planning the PRACH This section describes the parameters for planning the LTE PRACH. You can refer to this section when setting PRACH parameters in the LTE PRACH Planning dialog box. Parameter

Description

Available Root Sequence Index

Available Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence indexes. l Preamble Format (0-3): ZC sequence indexes available for the cells whose preamble format is set to 0-3. The maximum value range is from 0 to 837. l Preamble Format (4): ZC sequence indexes available for the cells whose preamble format is set to 4. The maximum value range is from 0 to 137. This parameter is available only for the LTE-TDD network.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


264



Parameter

Description

Calculate Cell Radius

Whether to calculate the cell radius. If this option is selected, the cell radius needs to be calculated. If this option is not selected, the cell radius set for an NE is used.

Propagation Radius

Cell radius is calculated based on the calculation radius of the propagation model.

Propagation Radius Factor

Conversion factor for the Calculation radius of a propagation model.

Coverage Radius

Cell radius is calculated based on the signal coverage of cells.

Resolution(m)

Precision of the coverage calculation. The default value is 50.


Minimum receive level of signals for cell coverage.

Shadowing taken into account

Whether to consider shadow fading when calculating signal coverage of cells.


Cell edge coverage probability used for calculating shadow fading.

Indoor Coverage

Whether to take penetration loss into account.

Area

Area for PRACH planning. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Cell Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.

Parameters for Viewing PRACH Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing or modifying PRACH planning results. You can refer to this section when viewing PRACH planning results in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box or in the carrier property window. Parameter

Description

Cell Name


HighSpeed

Indicates whether the cell is a high-speed cell. In PRACH planning, high-speed cells are preferentially planned.

Preamble Format(4)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Whether the preamble format of the cell is 4.


265



Parameter

Description

Ncs

Indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zerocorrelated cells allocated for a cell. The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH planning. The possible values of this parameter are as follows: l High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82, 100, 128, 158, 202, or 237. l Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59, 76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419.

Cell Radius


Existed Min Root Sequence Index

Indicates the existing start ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Suggested Start Root Sequence Index

Indicates the planned start ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Suggested End Root Sequence Index

Indicates the planned end ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index

Indicates the confirmed start ZC root sequence index.

Confirmed End Root Sequence Index

Indicates the confirmed end ZC root sequence index.

Reuse Tier (Topology)

Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on the geographical location.

Reuse Distance(m)

Indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimum reuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.

Reuse Tier (Neighbor)

Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on neighboring relationship.

Actual Required Reuse Tier (Neighbor)

Indicates the actually required number of reuse tiers when resources are allocated to cells.

Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor)

Indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is reduced when resources are allocated to cells.

Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties This section describes the parameters for setting PCI Display Properties in the PCI Display Options dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


266




Description

Display Links

Marks PCI results in lines of different colors.

Display Cell Color

Identifies PCI results in cell colors.

Selected Cell Color


Select PCI type

Selects the PCI results to be displayed in the map window.

Table 3-83 Parameters on the PCI Display Color tab page Parameter

Description

Same PCI

Indicates the cells with the same PCI.

Same MOD3

Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 3 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.

Same MOD6

Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 6 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.

Basic Parameters of a Site This section describes the parameters displayed or hidden in the Sites table. You can refer to this section when viewing basic parameters of a site in the Columns to be displayed dialog box. Parameter

Description

Site Name

Name of a site. This parameter uniquely identifies a site. The U-Net provides a default name for each new site.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Site ID

Site ID.

X

Geodetic coordinate X (X coordinate).

Y

Geodetic coordinate Y (Y coordinate).

Longitude

Longitudinal coordinate.

Latitude

Latitudinal coordinate.

Altitude(m)

Altitude.


Whether to manually type the altitude of a site for calculation. If this item is selected, you need to type the altitude of a site manually.

Comments

Comments on a site. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267



Parameter

Description

Support Type

Base station type. Macro indicates a macro base station, Micro indicates a micro base station.

Setting Link Matrix Parameters This section describes the parameters required for planning LTE cells. You can refer to this section when setting parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. Parameter

Description

Resolution (m)

Indicates the link matrix calculation resolution. The default value is 50.

With Shadow

Indicates whether to impose shadow fading. By default, this option is selected.


Indicates the cell edge coverage. The default value is 75%. NOTE This parameter can be set only when shadow fading is imposed.

Indoor Coverage

Indicates whether to impose indoor coverage. By default, this option is not selected.

Terminal

Select a preset terminal type from the dropdown list.

Service

Select a preset service type from the dropdown list.

Polygon Region

Select a polygon region.

Select DT Data

Select a DT data source.

Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group This section describes the parameters for creating and setting an LTE cell planning group. You can refer to this section when creating or setting an LTE cell planning group in the LTE Cell Planning dialog box.

Parameters on the General Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of an LTE cell planning group. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Parameter

Description

DL RSRP Target Ratio

Indicates the percentage of the downlink RSRP that reaches the specified threshold in the selected calculation area. The value range is from 0% to 100%.

DL RSRP Threshold(dBm)

Indicates the threshold that the downlink RSRP reaches.

DL RS SINR Target Ratio

Indicates the percentage of the downlink RS SINR that reaches the specified threshold in the selected calculation area. The value range is from 0% to 100%.

DL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)

Indicates the threshold that the downlink RS SINR reaches.

UL RSRP Target Ratio

Indicates the percentage of the uplink RSRP that reaches the specified threshold in the selected calculation area. The value range is from 0% to 100%.

UL RSRP Threshold(dBm)

Indicates the threshold that the uplink RSRP reaches.

UL RS SINR Target Ratio

Indicates the percentage of the uplink RS SINR that reaches the specified threshold in the selected calculation area. The value range is from 0% to 100%.

UL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)

Indicates the threshold that the uplink RS SINR reaches.

DL RSRP Fitness Weight

Indicates the weight of the downlink RSRP performance counter of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 100.

DL RS SINR Fitness Weight

Indicates the weight of the downlink RS SINR performance counter of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 100.

UL RSRP Fitness Weight

Indicates the weight of the uplink RSRP performance counter of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 100.

UL RS SINR Fitness Weight

Indicates the weight of the uplink RS SINR performance counter of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 100.


269



Parameters on the Advanced Tab Page Parameter

Description

Azimuth Step Size(°)

Indicates the step length at which the antenna azimuth is adjusted. The value range is from -360 to 360.

Tilt Step Size(°)

Indicates the step length at which the antenna tile angle is adjusted. The value range is from -90 to 90.

RS Power Step Size(dBm)

Indicates the step length at which the cell transmit power is adjusted. The value range is from 0 to 46.

Search Range

Indicates the range to be calculated for each optimization during the planning. The value range is from 1 to 4. A larger parameter value indicates a more accurate planning result but a longer calculation time.

Iteration Count

Indicates the maximum number of iterations during the whole planning. The value ranges from 1 to 100. A larger parameter value indicates a more accurate planning result but a longer calculation time.

Fitness Statistics Based on DT

Indicates whether to plan LTE cells based on DT data. l If this parameter is selected, LTE cells are planned based on DT data. l If this parameter is not selected, LTE cells are not planned based on DT data.

Parameters on the Area Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Analysis Area

Indicates the analysis area for LTE cell automatic planning. Cells in this area are involved in LTE Cell parameter adjustment.


270



Parameter

Description

Simulation Area

Simulation area for automatic LTE cell planning. This area monitors the entire LTE Cell adjustment effect. During the planning, the system imposes the interference of sites in the simulation area to the sites in the analysis area. NOTE l If the project contains only one polygon, this polygon is selected in both the analysis and simulation areas. l If the project contains polygons, the simulation area must contain the analysis area.

Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results This section describes parameters for viewing LTE cell planning results. Table 3-84 Parameters on the Cells Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Iteration

Indicates the number of an iteration.

Site Name

Indicates the name of a site.

Site ID

Indicates the ID of a site.

Cell Name


Local Cell ID


Original Azimuth(°)

Indicates the original antenna azimuth for a cell.

Optimized Azimuth(°)

Indicates the optimized antenna azimuth for a cell.

Original RS Power(dBm)

Indicates the original RS power for a cell.

Optimized RS Power(dBm)

Indicates the optimized RS power for a cell.

Original Tilt(°)

Indicates the original antenna tilt angle for a cell.

Optimized Tilt(°)

Indicates the optimized antenna tilt angle for a cell.


271



Parameter

Description

Original Fitness

Indicates the original fitness value of a cell. The fitness value represents cell performance.

Optimized Fitness

Indicates the optimized fitness value of a cell.

Table 3-85 Parameters on the Fitness Tab Page Parameter

Description

Iteration

Indicates the number of an iteration.

Fitness

Indicates the fitness value of each iteration. NOTE The system automatically calculates the value after each iteration.

Table 3-86 Parameters on the Coverage KPI Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

DL RSRP

After DL RSRP is selected, the DL RSRP coverage prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

DL RS SINR

After DL RS SINR is selected, the DLRS SINR coverage prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

UL RSRP

After UL RSRP is selected, the UL RSRP coverage prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

UL RS SINR

After UL RS SINR is selected, the ULRS SINR coverage prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

Iteration

Indicates the first iteration to be compared.

Compare Iteration

Indicates the second iteration to be compared.


272


4 LTE-TDD Network Planning

4

LTE-TDD Network Planning

About This Chapter The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on network planning in different scenarios. 4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net. 4.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 4.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 4.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 4.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


273



Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction. 4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report. 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


274



4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning This section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this section when planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net. Figure 4-1 shows the process of LTE-TDD network planning. Figure 4-1 Process of LTE-TDD network planning

Table 4-1describes the detailed information about Figure 4-1. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


275



Table 4-1 Description of the LTE-TDD network planning process No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project


2



3



4

Adding a device

You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

5


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters.

6


You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters.

7


The method for calculating the path loss for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.

8


For details, see 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction.

9

Planning PCI/ frequency/PRACH/ neighboring cells

For details, see 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters.

10

Creating a traffic map

The method for creating a traffic map for LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD network on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.

11

Performing capacity simulation

For details, see 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation.



12

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


The capacity simulation results can be applied to prediction.


276




Context l


l






Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



277





l




Context The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.


Context The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands. For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for Setting Bands.


Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


278



4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before capacity prediction.

4.6.1 Setting MCS Types This section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly the demodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS types do not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.

Context The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes (QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD. Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed. Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For information on how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2. Figure 4-3 MCS

Table 4-2 Parameters for Setting the MCS

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Index

Indicates the index of an MCS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279



Parameter

Description

Highest modulation

Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of the following: l QPSK l 16QAM l 64QAM

Modulation Order

Indicates a modulation exponent.

Coding Rate

Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to 2.

Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)

Indicates the bearer efficiency. Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation exponent

Step 5 Click

to close the table.

----End

4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.

Context For an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. If...

Then...


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 4-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 4-3.


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD > the existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify the parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 4-3.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


280



Figure 4-4 New

Table 4-3 Description of service parameters Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a service type.

Type

Service type. l Voice: CS services. l Data: PS services.

GBR

GBR service.

Priority

Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service priority for subscribers in capacity simulation. 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Activity Factor

Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only for CS services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s)

Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s. Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


281



Parameter

Description

MAC PDU(kbit)

Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.


Maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.


Minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 107. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.


Average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput.


Uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Offset(kbit/s)

Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.

IBLER(%)

Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Body Loss(dB)

Body loss.


4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


282



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If...

Then...


In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new receiver and select type of MCS Table.


Perform Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters for the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4. If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed. Step 6 Click OK. Table 4-4 Parameters for setting LTE-TDD receivers Parameter

Description

Name


MCS Table

Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.

Mobility

Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

MIMO


IBLER(%)

Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to 100.

Channel Relativity

Indicates the channel relativity.

Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set to PDSCH MCS.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


283



Parameter

Description

MCS Threshold

Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver. You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS bearer information in the Demodulation area. l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required during demodulation. l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the spectrum. l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation thresholds.

----End

4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If...

Then...

Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > type LTE-TDD. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type. Modify an 1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > existing terminal LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.

Table 4-5 Parameter description of a terminal type Parameter

Meaning

Name


UE Category

Indicates the category of a terminal. The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from 1 to 5.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


284



Parameter

Meaning

UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)

Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.

DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)

Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.

Support UL 64 QAM

Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.

Maximum Layer Number

Indicates the maximum number of layers.

Min Tx Power(dBm)


Max Tx Power(dBm)


Noise Figure(dB)


Cable Loss(dB)


Supported BF

Indicates whether to support the beamforming (BF). The available options are Not supported, TM7, and TM8.

UL RS Offset(dB)

Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplink direction.

RB Number

Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported by the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction.

Reception Equipment

Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.

Gain(dBi)


Number of Transmission Antenna Ports


Number of Reception Antenna Ports


----End


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


285



Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.6 Setting User Types.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.

4.7.2 Creating a Single Site This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


286



Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details, see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.

4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l


Select Template Management from the drop-down list on the toolbar. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.


2.

The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


287



For example, l

.



l

2.

Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.

3.

Click OK.



2.


3.

View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End



Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


288



4.7.6 Creating a Transceiver This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.

Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details, see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.

4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-TDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDD cell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells. Figure 4-6 LTE-TDDCell

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


289




4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting LTE-TDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.

Site Tab Page Parameter

Description

Name


Support Type




Hexagon Radius


Comments

Description.

Transceiver Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Transceivers


Model


Site Equipment


Mechanical Downtilt

Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.

Electrical Downtilt

Indicates the electrical tilt angle.

Height/Ground(m)



Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.




290



Parameter

Description





Total Loss(DL)


Total Loss(UL)


Comments

Description.

General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter

Description

Max Power(dBm)


RS Power(dBm)


Actual Load(DL)


Actual Load(UL)


Target IoT(UL)(dB)


Actual IoT(UL)(dB)


CCU IoT(dB)


CEU IoT(dB)


Frequency Band


Channel Index


Reception


Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. For the details of the value, see Table 4-6.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.


291



Parameter

Description

Frame Configuration

Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes. l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are included. l For example, the value of this parameter can be DSUUUDSUUU. D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.

Priority


Channel Relativity


COMP


IRC


Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter

Description

Downlink

Indicates the downlink parameters. You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Uplink

Indicates the uplink parameters. You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.



ICIC(UL)

Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) in the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


292



Parameter

Description

ICIC(DL)

Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink. l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set in cell attributes is used. l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for the cell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge. l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC can be enabled automatically and edge band mode can be configured automatically. Users can plan the edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without having to configure the parameter for the cells one by one.

Edge Frequency Style(UL)




Power Control

Indicates the power control in the downlink.

Target Load

Indicates the target load.



Max Schedule Users

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



293



Parameter

Description



Schedule Policy


TTI Bundling

Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.

VMIMO


Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter

Description

PBCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and the unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PA(dB)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


294



Parameter

Description

CCU PA(dB)


CEU PA(dB)


PB(dB)


Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page Parameter

Description

Propagation Model


Radius(m)


Resolution(m)



Description

TM1


TM2


TM3


TM4


TM6


TM7


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


295



Value

Description

TM8


OL_Adaptive


CL_Adaptive


OL_CL_Adaptive


TM7_MIMO_Adaptive


TM8_MIMO_Adaptive


Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-TDD cell or modifying the properties of an LTE-TDD cell.

LTE-TDDCell Tab Page Table 4-7 LTE-TDDCell tab page Parameter

Description

GCI

Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.

Name

Indicates the name of a carrier. The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Active

Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

Frequency Band


Channel Index



296



Parameter

Description

Target Load(UL)

Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Target Load(DL)

Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Actual Load(UL)


Actual Load(DL)


RS Power(dBm)


PBCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB)

Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

Max Power(dBm)


Actual IoT(UL)(dB)


High Speed

Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to one of the following values: l LowSpeed l HighSpeed l HighwaySpeed

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Radius(m)


Min Root Sequence Index

Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.


297



Parameter

Description

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor)

Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship). The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.

Preamble Format

Preamble format.

Reception


RS SINR Access Threshold(DL) (dB)


Priority


PB(dB)


Schedule Policy


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

PCI

Indicates the physical ID of a cell.

PCI Reuse Distance(Km)

Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.

PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor)

Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the neighbor relationship).

Scene


MCC


MNC


CI


DlEarfcn

Indicates a downlink ARFCN.

UlEarfcn

Indicates an uplink ARFCN.

TAC

Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).

Local Cell ID


Reselect Priority

Indicates the cell reselection priority.


298



Parameter

Description

PA(dB)


CCU PA(dB)


CEU PA(dB)


CCU IoT(dB)


CEU IoT(dB)


Alpha

This is an open loop power control parameter and indicates the path loss compensation coefficient.

Po(dBm)

This is an open loop power control parameter.

TTI Bundling

Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered. By default, this option is not selected.

Multi-user Beamforming

Determines whether to enable the Multi-user Beamforming function during downlink scheduling.

VMIMO

Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multipleoutput (VMIMO) is considered. By default, this option is not selected.

IRC


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


299



Parameter

Description

COMP


Channel Relativity


Transmission Mode

Indicates the transmission mode. For details, see Table 4-8.

VIP

For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot power.

Throughput(UL)

Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Throughput(DL)

Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(UL)

Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(DL)

Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 0.

Density

Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max. The default value is 800.

Azimuth Locked

Whether the azimuth is locked.

Azimuth Min. Value

Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is -20.

Azimuth Max. Value

Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges from -360 to 360. The default value is 20.

Electronic Downtilt Locked

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Whether the electrical tilt is locked.


300



Parameter

Description

Electronic Downtilt Min. Value

Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is -10.

Electronic Downtilt Max. Value

Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value ranges from -90 to 90. The default value is 14.

RsPower Locked

Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.

RsPower Min. Value(dB)

Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 10.

RsPower Max. Value(dB)

Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value ranges from 0 to 46. The default value is 20.

Fitness Threshold(%)

Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 90.

Comments

Description.

State

Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage. The value can be Working or Outage. The default value is Working.

Advance Parameters

Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-9.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS

Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.

Frame Configuration

Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes. l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are included. l For example, the value of this parameter can be DSUUUDSUUU. D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.

Neighbours list

Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-10.

Propagation Models

Sets the propagation model by clicking this button. For details, see Table 4-11.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


301




Description

TM1


TM2


TM3


TM4


TM6


TM7


TM8


OL_Adaptive


CL_Adaptive


OL_CL_Adaptive


TM7_MIMO_Adaptive


TM8_MIMO_Adaptive


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


302



Table 4-9 Advance Parameters tab page Parameter

Description



ICIC(UL)

Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the uplink. l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell properties. l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge. Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.

ICIC(DL)





Power Control Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the power control on the downlink.


303



Parameter

Description

Edge Frequency Style

Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users on the uplink and downlink.



Max Schedule Users


Target IoT(UL)(dB)


Table 4-10 Cell Neighbors tab page Parameter

Description

Intra-frequency Neighbors

Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-frequency Neighbors

Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors

Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Table 4-11 Propagation tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Propagation Model


Radius(m)


Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation model.

Propagation Model

Indicates the extension propagation model.

Radius(m)


Resolution(m)

Indicates the calculation precision of the extended propagation model.


304



General Tab Page Table 4-12 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name


Site


Hexagon Radius(m)








Comments


Antenna Config Tab Page Table 4-13 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page Parameter

Description

Antenna ID


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Power Ratio


Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude



305



Parameter

Description

Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height(m)


RRU ID


Equipment



Description

Input Total Loss


Site Equipment TMA


Feeder

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



to


Feeder Length(m)





306



Parameter

Description



JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)


Total Loss(dB)


4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.

4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters This section describes the meanings of LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. NOTE


Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 4-15 Description of LTE-TDD prediction counters

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Category

Counter

Meaning


Best Server

Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that receive downlink signals.

DL RSRP

Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS) received from the primary serving cell.

DL BandWidth RSRP

Indicates the strength of downlink reference signals on the entire bandwidth.


307



Category

Counter

Meaning

DL RSSI

Total power received by a UE on the entire bandwidth. The power includes the receive power of the serving cell, interference power of other cells, and the noise power of the UE.

PDSCH Signal Level

Indicates the received power of the traffic channel RE.

Handover Area

Whether an area is a handover area.

DL ICIC Zone

Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC threshold.

Pilot Pollution

Determines whether a point has pilot pollution and check the number of cells producing pilot pollution. To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised to select With Shadow. NOTE By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot that reaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn about pilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage area intuitively.


Coverage by Signal Level (UL)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

DL RS SINR

Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal that a UE receives. This counter reflects the quality of the downlink reference signal.

PDSCH SINR

Indicates the Signal Interference and Noise Ratio (SINR) of the traffic channel. This counter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.

DL RSRQ

Quality of the received downlink reference signals.

PDCCH SINR

Indicates the PDCCH SINR.

UL RSRP

Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.

PUSCH Signal Level

Indicates the power that a cell receives on the PUSCH RE.

UL User RB TxPower

Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).

UL User BandWidth TxPower

Indicates the uplink transmit power on the user bandwidth.

UL ICIC Zone

Indicates the uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.

UL RS SINR

SINR of the uplink reference signal.

PUSCH SINR

Indicates the SINR of the traffic channel. This counter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.


308



Category

Counter

Meaning

Coverage by MCS(UL)

PUSCH MCS

The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.

Coverage by MCS(DL)

PDSCH MCS

The highest MCS supported by the downlink PDSCH.


UL MAC Peak Throughput

Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

UL Application Peak Throughput

Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.


DL MAC Peak Throughput

Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

DL Application Peak Throughput

Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


309




LTE-TDD Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm through a schematic diagram. Figure 4-8 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


310



Figure 4-8 LTE-TDD prediction algorithm

Table 4-16 describes the process of LTE-TDD prediction algorithm. Table 4-16 Description of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm Step

Operation

Description

1


Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction counters of this cell are not calculated.

2


l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the path loss matrix. l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained directly.

3

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)




311



Step

Operation

Description

4

Predicting slow fading by using the shadowing margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability. Certain power of the base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadowing margin. You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing margin into account during the calculation of link loss.

5

Calculating the DL RSRP to determine the primary serving cell

The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at the downlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.

6



7

Determining the target RRU in the uplink

If a cell in the calculation area is an SFN cell, you must determine the target RRU of the cell in the uplink.

8

Calculating counters of the traffic channel and common channel based on the BIN

Calculating counters of the traffic channel and common channel such as DL RS SINR, PDSCH SINR, UL RS SINR, and PUSCH SINR based on the BIN

9




Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

l

Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


312




Meaning







Path loss


Shadow fading


Penetration loss







Prerequisites l


l



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Calculation


313



– If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again. l



Then...

Calculate


Calculate forcibly





Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


314




----End



Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


315




Then ...





NOTE



4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Prerequisites l


l


l




2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


316



4.


5.


6.

Click OK.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see 4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End


4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell The U-Net can perform a single cell prediction in a specified area. In this case, other cells are deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe the prediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions. Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


317



Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see 4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End

Follow-up Procedure The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view details.

4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Procedure l

View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map).

l

View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).

----End

4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result After calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, after improving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare the prediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of prediction analysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.

Context The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result.

4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


318



Context The methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode are the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.

Procedure l

Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.

l

Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.

l

Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.

----End

4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data The DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is complete in order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. This helps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable, and this procedure can be ignored.

Context The method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.

4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data You can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete for geographical locating.

Context The method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.

4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


319




Description

Group Name


Prediction Type

Prediction type.

Study Selected

Prediction counter.

Calculate Now


Parameter in the Group Properties dialog box Table 4-18 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name

Name of a prediction group.

Resolution(m)

Precision of the prediction.

Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)

Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area is set.

Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)

Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells. This parameter is valid only after Handover Area is set.

Polygon

Calculation area for the prediction.

Neighbour PDSCH Load

Whether the load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Neighbour PDCCH Load

Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cell is taken into account in the calculation. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

With Shadow

Whether the shadow fading is taken into account in the calculation.


Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.


320



Parameter

Description

Indoor Coverage

Whether the penetration loss is taken into account.

Table 4-19 Parameters on the Condition tab page Parameter

Description

Signal Level(DL)(dBm)

Receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.

Signal Level(UL)(dBm)

Receive threshold of the uplink reference signal.

Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm)

Interference threshold.

Terminal

Mobility type.

Service

Service type.

Mobility

Mobility type.

Table 4-20 Parameters on the Advanced tab page Parameter

Description

Frequency Name

Name of a frequency band.

Channel Index

Frequency corresponding to a frequency band.

4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net generates a statistical report.

Context The method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.

4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


321



4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning The physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs is unavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the system to automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planning is complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.

Context For PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.

4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning To ensure successful random access of the LTE-TDD network, you must plan the physical random access channel (PRACH) parameters for each cell in the LTE-TDD network. PRACH planning refers to the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC) planning.

Context The method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.

4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning After creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.

Context The method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTEFDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.

4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning After base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, you can enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs for each cell.

Context For frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.

4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning This section describes how to perform LTE cell automatic planning. You can use this function to adjust the electrical downtilt and azimuth of an antenna and transmission power of a cell so that each prediction counter in the calculation area meets your configuration requirements. This reduces the dependence on network planning engineers' experience and the times of adjusting parameter settings. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


322



Context For details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


323


5 GSM Network Planning

5

GSM Network Planning

About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements. 5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a GSM network by using the U-Net. 5.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 5.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 5.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 5.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


324



environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction. 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 5.8 GSM Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one. 5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet. 5.11 TSC Planning This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created, you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based, and VAMOS-based TSC planning. 5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


325



5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a GSM network by using the U-Net. Figure 5-1 shows the process of GSM network planning. Figure 5-1 Process of GSM network planning

Table 5-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 5-1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


326



Table 5-1 Process of GSM network planning No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project


2



3



4

Adding a device

You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

5


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters.

6


You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters.

7



8

Planning neighboring cells

For details, see 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning .

9


For details, see 5.8 GSM Prediction.

10

Planning TSC

For details, see 5.11 TSC Planning.

11




5.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


327



Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.

Context l


l







You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


328



The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE


l










329



5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.

5.6.1 Setting MOS This section describes how to set the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). The MOS indicates the quality of calls in the current network status. You can refer to this section to modify the attributes of MOS as required. You can also create new MOS types if the existing MOS types do not meet your requirements.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM. Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOS Table dialog box is displayed Figure 5-3 MOS

Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2. You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box. Table 5-2 Description of parameters in the MOS Table dialog box

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Meaning

Index

Indicates the MOS index. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330



Parameter

Meaning

Name

Indicates the name of the speech coding scheme.

Mobility

Indicates the mobility type of a receiving device.

C/(I+N)-MOS

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the MOS.


5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.

Context The U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile Internet Access, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. Option

Description

If...

Then...


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 5-3.

Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 5-3.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


331



Figure 5-4 New

Table 5-3 Parameters for setting GSM services Parameter

Meaning

Name

Indicates the name of a service type.

Type

Indicates a service type. l CSServie: CS services. l PSServie: PS services.

Priority

Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Body Loss(dB)

Indicates the loss due to the human body.

Activity

Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only CS services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s)

Indicates the rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s. The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

FER(%)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.


332



Parameter

Meaning


Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput


Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to 104. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput


Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput. l Uplink: average uplink throughput. l Downlink: average downlink throughput. NOTE Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput


Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate. l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

IBLER(%)

Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Offset(kbit/s)

Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 100. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 100.


5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


333



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If you need to...

Then...


Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked with *) in the dialog box. Set Link Type.


Go to Step 5 directly.

Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4. Step 6 Click OK. Table 5-4 Parameters for setting GSM receivers Parameter

Meaning

Name


LinkType

Indicates whether a receiver is on the uplink or downlink.

Mobility

Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For details about how to create or modify a mobility type, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

IBLER(%)

Indicates the block error rate (BLER).

Demodulation

l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if this parameter is located in the PSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter. l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if this parameter is located in the CSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter.

FER(%)

Indicates the frame error rate.

Voice Code Model

Indicates a voice coding scheme.

C/(I+N) Threshold

Indicates the threshold of the SINR for CS or PS services.

C/(I+N)-Throughput

Indicates the SINR throughput of CS or PS services.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


334



5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If you need to...

Then...

Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > type GSM. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 5-5. Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > existing terminal GSM > An existing terminal type. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table 5-5.

Table 5-5 Parameters for setting GSM terminal types Parameter

Meaning

Name


Support Frequency Band

Indicates the main frequency used by a terminal.

Min Tx Power(dBm)


Max Tx Power(dBm)


Noise Figure(dB)


Cable Loss(dB)


Attenuation(dB)

Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.

Gain(dBi)


Reception Equipment

Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal. For details, see 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.

Number of Transmission Antennas

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



335



Parameter

Meaning

Number of Reception Antennas


Code Configuration

Indicates a voice coding scheme.

Technology

Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.

Number of TimeSlots(DL)

Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported on the downlink. This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM because a GSM user occupies only one channel.

Number of Timeslots(UL)

Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported on the uplink. This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM because a GSM user occupies only one channel.

Support Half-Rate

Indicates whether the half rate is supported.

Support DTX

Indicates whether DTX is supported.

----End



5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


336






5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l


dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


337



2.

The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list. Such as

l

.



l

2.

Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.

3.

Click OK.



2.


3.

Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End


5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same way.


5.7.5 Creating a Repeater This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


338



from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.

Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.



5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6. Figure 5-6 Properties

Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


339




5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting GSM NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.


Description

Name


Support Type




Hexagon Radius


Comments

Description.

Transceiver Area on the GSM Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Transceivers


Comments

Description.

Model

Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.

Site Equipment



Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt

Indicates the mechanical downtilt.

Electrical Downtilt

Indicates the electrical downtilt.

Height/Ground(m)


Total Loss(DL)



340



Parameter

Description

Total Loss(UL)


General Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page Parameter

Description

Max Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum transmit power.

IoT Target(UL)

Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.

DTX

Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used.

TRX Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.

Target Load(DL)

Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL)

Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Frequency Band


Reception


Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page Parameter

Description

Propagation Model


Radius(m)


Resolution(m)


Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells This section describes the parameters for creating a GSM cell or modifying the properties of a GSM cell.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


341



Table 5-6 GSMCell tab page Parameter

Description

Name


Active

Indicates whether to activate the current cell.

Frequency Band


Target Load(DL)


Target Load(UL)


DTX

Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used.

IoT Target(UL)

Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.

Max Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum transmit power of a transceiver. When the value of Max Power(dBm), Frequency Band, or PB(dB) is changed, the system automatically calculates the value of RS Power (dBm).

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

MS Max Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum transmit power of an MS. The unit is dBm.

Reception


SynchroRank

Indicates the synchronization parameter.

TRX Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.

Coverage Type

Indicates the cell coverage type used during capacity planning.

Co-BCCH Signal Difference

Indicates the signal strength difference between GSM900 and GSM1800.

Mapping Cell

Indicates the indoor mapping cell.

Use In Capability

Indicates whether the cell is used for capacity absorption.

Scene


MCC


MNC


LAC

Indicates a location area code.

CI



342



Parameter

Description

CGI

Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).

RAC

Indicates the route area code.

BSC ID

Indicates the ID of the BSC that a cell belongs to.

BTS ID

Indicates the ID of the BTS that a cell belongs to.

Local Cell ID

Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell from other cells under the same BSC.

BSC Name

Indicates the name of a base station controller.

Module Type

Indicates the type of a module.

Module Info

Indicates the module information.

TRX Number

Indicates the number of TRXs.

Max TRX Number

Indicates the number of TRXs that can be configured in a cell.

Swap Status

Indicates the swapping status.

Hopping Mode

Indicates the hopping mode of a cell. This parameter can be set to one of the following values: l NO_FH l BaseBand_FH l Hybrid_FH l RF_FH

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Frame Offset

Indicates the frame offset.

BSIC

Indicates the base transceiver station identity code.

BCCH

Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of the BCCH TRX in a cell.

TCH

Indicates the collection of ARFCNs of the TCH TRXs in a cell.

MAIO

Indicates the collection of mobile allocation index offsets (MAIOs) of TRXs in a cell.

AFPFreqNum

Indicates the number of GSM TRXs generated by one row of data when users import the engineering parameters.

HSN

Indicates the hopping sequence number (HSN) of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 63.

MA

Indicates a set of frequency hopping ARFCNs.

MAIO Plan

Indicates the MAIO planning information.

TSC

Indicates the training sequence code. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343



Parameter

Description

VAMOS Main TSC

Indicates the primary training sequence code for VAMOS.

VAMOS Sub TSC

Indicates the secondary training sequence code for VAMOS.

Comments

Description.

Propagation Models

Indicates a propagation model.


Description

Name


Site


Hexagon Radius(m)








Comments



Description

Antenna ID


Power Ratio

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



344



Parameter

Description

Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude


Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height(m)


RRU ID


Equipment



Description

Input Total Loss


Site Equipment

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



345



Parameter

Description

TMA


Feeder


to


Feeder Length(m)






JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)


Total Loss(dB)


5.8 GSM Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.

5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters This section describes the meanings of the GSM prediction counters. The U-Net can be used to predict multiple GSM counters. NOTE


Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


346



Table 5-10 Description of GSM prediction counters Category

Counter

Description


DL BCCH Signal Level

Indicates the strength of the downlink BCCH signals received by a terminal.

Best Server

Indicates the cell that has the strongest DL BCCH signal strength among the cells that receive downlink signals.

DL TCH Signal Level

Indicates the strength of the downlink traffic signals received by a terminal.

DL BCCH CIR

Indicates the quality of received downlink BCCH signals.

DL Service CIR

Indicates the receive quality of the downlink TCH/ PDCH.

Geometry

Indicates a geographical factor, which represents the difference between the highest receive power and the interference power.


UL Service CIR

Indicates the receive quality of the uplink TCH/ PDCH.

Coverage Area Analysis

Coding Scheme

Indicates the best coding scheme that you can select according to channels.

MOS

Indicates the mean opinion score (MOS), which is used for assessing voice quality.

Handover Area

Indicates whether an area is a handover area.

Coverage Area

Indicates the coverage area of the current network.


DL PDCH MAC Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink PDCH at the MAClayer.

DL PDCH Application Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink PDCH at the application layer.


UL PDCH MAC Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH at the MAC layer.

UL PDCH Application Peak Throughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH at the application layer.


Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 5-7 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


347




GSM Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the GSM prediction algorithm through a schematic chart. Figure 5-8 shows the schematic chart of the GSM prediction algorithm.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


348



Figure 5-8 GSM prediction algorithm

Table 5-11 describes the process of GSM prediction algorithm. Table 5-11 Description of the GSM prediction algorithm

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Procedur e

Operation

Description

1


Determines whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction counters of this cell are not calculated.


349



Procedur e

Operation

Description

2


l If the path loss matrix does not exist, it needs to be calculated. l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be directly obtained.

3



4

Predicting slow fading by using the shadow fading margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability, certain power of the base station is reserved against the shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadowing margin. You can enable the U-Net to consider the shadowing margin during the calculation of link loss.

5

Calculating the DL BCCH to determine the primary serving cell

DL BCCH indicates the receive level of the downlink broadcast frequency and it is a key counter in prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.

6



7

Calculating counters of traffic channels and common channels based on the Bin points

You can calculate the required counters and custom counters such as DL BCCH Rx Power, Best Server, power of interference noises, and handover area of Bin points.

8


The U-Net displays the prediction results in different colors in a window and provides a prediction report.


Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

l

Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


350



The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 5-12 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas. Table 5-12 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor

Meaning







Antenna fading of a terminal

Fading of the antenna on a terminal.

Path loss


Shadow fading


Penetration loss







Prerequisites l Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Base stations (sites and cells) are available. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

351



l



Calculation – If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results. – If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case, the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.

l



Then...

Calculate


Calculate forcibly




Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 5-9. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


352




----End



Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


353




Then ...





NOTE



5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Prerequisites l


l


l




2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


354



4.


5.


6.

Click OK.


Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see 5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End


5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Procedure l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355



l


----End

5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences. This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.



2.


3.


Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group. 1.


2.




2.


3.



4.


5.


----End



2.


3.


4.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


356



5.





l


l


5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.

Exporting Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.

Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.

Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin Point After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.

Procedure l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

1.


2.


Then...




357



l

If...

Then...



3.


4.


5.

Click Export.

Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a Bin point within the range. 1.


2.


Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level.

NOTE

You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.

3.

Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level from the shortcut menu. – When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding two indicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power. – The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.

4.

In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator. The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified range.

5. l

Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Click Export.

In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358



2.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.

3.

Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.

4.

Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N records to be exported.

5.

Click Export.

6.

After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data. NOTE

l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH Signal Level when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12. l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This value specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.

Figure 5-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box

Figure 5-12 Indicator selection

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


359



Figure 5-13 Property setting

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The exported contents mainly include: l


l

Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.

Printing Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


360



Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.


Prerequisites l

The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or created.

l

The coverage prediction for DL BCCH Signal Level is complete.

l

The DT data file has been imported.

Context The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.


Context For detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin Point.

5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.

5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


361



Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l



5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the actual situation of the network.

Prerequisites l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


362



l


l


l


l


Context




5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.

Prerequisites l


l


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-14. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


363



Figure 5-14 Neighbor Automatic Allocation

Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see 5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells. Step 5 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For detailed description of parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End

Follow-up Procedure Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.

3.


4.


5.

Click OK.

5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


364



Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT. NOTE



Then...




1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 5-16. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.




1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from the shortcut menu.. After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the original neighboring cell relationships are updated.


365



If you need to...

Then...


1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.







Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


366



If you need to...

Then...




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


367



Figure 5-16 Filter

----End

5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet.

5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.


Description

Group Name


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Prediction Type

Prediction type.

Study Selected

Prediction counter.


368



Parameter

Description

Calculate Now


Parameters in the GSM Group Properties Dialog Box Table 5-13 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Name


Resolution(m)

Indicates the prediction precision.



Polygon

Indicates the area calculated in prediction.


Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.

With Shadow

Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.

Indoor Coverage

Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation.


Description

Signal Level(dBm)

Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.

Terminal


Service

Indicates a service type.

Mobility


Table 5-15 Parameters on the Advance tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

TopNSignalLevel

Indicates the number of top receive levels to be ranked.


369



Parameter

Description

TrxDTXFactor

Indicates the DTX factor.

5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for planning GSM neighboring cells. Table 5-16 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Methods Select

Indicates a network planning scenario to be selected. l Topology: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of network topology. l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of prediction results. This method applies only to outdoor base stations. l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of both the network topology and the prediction results.

Max Neighbor Distance (km)

Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.


Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring relationships.

If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.

If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Indicates that internal cells are forcibly configured as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m)

Configures the two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when the distance between the two cells is smaller than the value of this parameter.

Swapped out cells taken into planning

Indicates whether swapped-out cells need to be planned.


Indicates whether existing neighboring cells need to be referred.

Azimuth Difference(°)

Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned and the cells used for reference.

Reference Site Distance (m)

Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells to be planned and the site of the cells used for reference.

Consider Handover Statistics

Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for saving the handover data.


370



Parameter

Description

Planning Weight

Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell ranking.

Handover Statistics Weight

Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell ranking.

Resolution(m)


Handover Area Percent (%)

Indicates the handover area proportion.

Compute Shadowing


This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction. Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%)

Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is considered. The value of this parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing fading. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Compute Indoor Loss

Indicates whether the penetration loss is considered in the calculation. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.





Area


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


371



Table 5-17 Parameters on the Intra-Technology tab page Parameter

Description


Indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells. This parameter is valid only when neighboring cells are planned on the basis of network topology.



Force Symmetry

Indicates whether to configure cells as bidirectional neighboring cells. If this option is selected during network capacity expansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells, adjusting the original neighbor relationship table.

Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring cell planning) Parameter

Description

SourceNetType

Indicates the system that the source cell belongs to.

To

Indicates the system that the cells to be planned belong to. NOTE If the target system for handovers is UMTS, you can set the UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (UARFCN) for the handovers.


Indicates the minimum signal receive level.



Max Number


5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 5-19 Parameters on the General tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Display Links


Display Cell Color



372



Parameter

Description



Selected Cell Color






Inter-RAT Neighbors




Table 5-20 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page Legend

Description

Intra Frequency


Inter Frequency


Inter-RAT


Intra Technology






Paired Inter-RAT




Add To Legend


Transparency


NOTE


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


373



5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 5-21 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells Parameter

Description

Source Cell


Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Intra-Technology


Inter-RAT




Empty List


Missing Co-Site


Missing Symmetry


List > No:




Same PCI


None





5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


374



Table 5-22 Tab page description Parameter

Description

Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Inter-RAT


The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page. Table 5-23 Parameter description Parameter

Description

Neighbor Name


Cause

Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the network. l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships. l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added by users. l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.

Confirm

Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.

5.11 TSC Planning This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created, you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based, and VAMOS-based TSC planning. The VAMOS feature increases the GSM network capacity when the network cannot be expanded due to restricted frequency. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performance without new hardware. In the VAMOS-based TSC planning, orthogonal TSCs are used to multiplex two subscribers to the same timeslot to increase voice capacity, but the voice quality decreases accordingly. The orthogonal TSCs need to be configured in pair to avoid intra-frequency interference when two VAMOS subscribers are using the same timeslot of the same frequency. In the IBCA-based TSC planning, the IBCA algorithm is used to search interference calls and allocate the channels with the minimum interference to subscribers. In this way, network Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


375



performance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing the interference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum of interference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. In this case, the U-Net is required.

5.11.1 Planning TSC This section describes how to perform TSC planning for the allocation of TSCs in cells and at sites in GSM networks. The planning result can be used for the VAMOS and IBCA features.

Prerequisites Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-17. Figure 5-17 Automatic Allocation

Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning. Step 5 Click Run. l You can right-click TSC Planning on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of TSCs. l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For details, see 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result. ----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


376




Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes. 1.


2.

On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.

3.

Right-click TSC Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.

4.

In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect.

5.

Click OK.

5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result This section describes how to manage the TSC planning result. After the TSC planning is complete, you can apply and export the planning result.

Prerequisites The TSC planning is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select TSC Planning in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Open TSC Table

Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


377



If you need to...

Then...

Apply the TSC planning result to each cell

1. Right-click in the TSC Planning Display window and choose Commit from the shortcut menu. 2. NE data is updated automatically after the TSC planning result is applied. NOTE l In the TSC Planning Display window, if you modify the values in the Confirm VamosMainTSC column, the values in the Confirm VamosSubTSC and Confirm TSC Group columns change accordingly. l In the main window of the U-Net, a message indicating whether the data is submitted successfully is displayed in the Event Viewer docked window in the lower part. Alternatively, you can access the GSM Cell Table tab page and check whether data is changed. If data on the GSM Cell Table tab page is changed, the data has been submitted successfully.

Export the TSC planning result

1. Right-click in the TSC Planning Display window and choose Export from the shortcut menu. 2. Set parameters in the displayed Data Export dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box. 3. Click Export. 4. Set the file format and file name and specify the saving path. Then, click Save. After the data is exported successfully, you can open it to view and modify the data.

Enable the map window and the planning result table to display the TSC planning result simultaneously

1. In the TSC Planning Display window, click a row heading. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window. 2. Information about the selected cell is displayed in the map window and the planning result table in the right pane of the TSC Planning Display window simultaneously, as shown in Figure 5-19. NOTE You need to select TSC Planning in the navigation tree so that the selected cell can be displayed in the map window.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


378



If you need to...

Then...

Enable the U-Net to display or hide certain columns

1. In the right pane of the TSC Planning Display window, right-click a certain table heading and choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, select or clear the check boxes of columns to be displayed or hidden. NOTE You can right-click a certain table heading in the TSC Planning Display window and choose Hide Columns from the shortcut menu to hide the selected column.

Figure 5-19 Display

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


379



----End

5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to perform IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performance in GSM networks. The configuration data of interference neighboring cells is required for the IBCA feature, which can be obtained after the interference neighboring cell planning is complete.

Prerequisites l

Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

l

The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-20. Figure 5-20 Automatic Allocation

Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning. Step 5 Click Run. l You can right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells. l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For details, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


380



5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes how to manage the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can export the planning result.

Prerequisites The planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation tree. NOTE

You need to select IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window.

Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The IBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required. If...

Then...

You want to export the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning

1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, right-click in the left pane and choose Export from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-21. 2. Set parameters in the displayed Data Export dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box. 3. Click Export. 4. Set the file format and file name and specify the saving path. Then, click Save. After the data is exported to a file, you can open it to view and modify the data.

You want to enable the map window to display the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning together with that in the planning result table

1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, click a cell in the left pane. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window. 2. In the right pane of the IBCA Interference Neighbor window, the interference neighboring cells of the selected cell is displayed in the map window and the planning result table at the same time, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


381



Figure 5-21 Export

Figure 5-22 IBCA Interference Neighbor

----End

5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning 5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning This section describes the parameters used for TSC planning in GSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the TSC Parameter Setting dialog box. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


382



Parameter

Description

Planning on

Network planning scenario l Common asynchronous network: TSC planning is performed on a common asynchronous network. l IBCA network: TSC planning is performed on an IBCA network. l VAMOS asynchronous network: TSC planning is performed on a VAMOS asynchronous network. l VAMOS synchronization network: TSC planning is performed on a VAMOS synchronization network.

Planning based on

l Site: TSC planning is performed based on sites. l Cell: TSC planning is performed based on cells.

Planning TSC based on existed TSC

If this item is selected, TSC planning is performed based on existing TSCs.

Data

l Interference Matrix Path: directory of the interference matrix file to be imported. NOTE Set parameters in the Data Import dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.

l The count of interference: maximum number of interference neighboring cells. The value ranges from 1 to 10. Area

Planning area You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter and select only the cells to be planned in the area. If you select Full Map, all the cells on the map are to be planned. You can set filter criteria such as Direction and Match case in the Filter dialog box.

5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result This section describes the parameters for viewing the TSC planning result. You can refer to this section when viewing the TSC planning result in the TSC Planning Display area after the TSC planning is complete.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


383



Parameter

Description

Site Name

Name of a site.

Site ID

ID of a site.

Cell Name

Name of a cell.

CI

ID of a cell.

Existed TSC

Existing TSC.

Existed VamosMainTSC

Existing VAMOS main TSC.

Existed VamosSubTSC

Existing VAMOS sub-TSC.

Existed TSC Group

Existing VAMOS TSC group.

Suggest TSC

Suggested TSC, that is, the TSC planning result. Suggest indicates that the obtained data after the TSC planning has not been applied to NEs.

Suggest VamosMainTSC

Obtained VAMOS main TSC after the planning.

Suggest VamosSubTSC

Obtained VAMOS sub-TSC after the planning.

Suggest TSC Group

Obtained VAMOS TSC group after the planning.

Confirm TSC

Confirmed TSC. By default, the value of Confirm TSC is the same as that of Suggest TSC. You can change the value manually. You submit the value of Confirm TSC as the TSC planning result.

Confirm VamosMainTSC

Confirmed VAMOS main TSC.

Confirm VamosSubTSC

Confirmed VAMOS sub-TSC.

Confirm TSC Group

Confirmed VAMOS TSC group.

5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning The section describes the parameters used for IBCA interference neighboring cell planning in GSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


384



Parameter

Description

Data

l Interference Matrix Path: directory of the interference matrix file to be imported. NOTE Set planning parameters in the Data Import dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.

l The count of interference: maximum number of interference neighboring cells. The value ranges from 1 to 64. Interference sort strategy

Mode for ranking interference neighboring cells. l Interferenced traffic to others: ranking interference neighboring cells by interference traffic of other cells caused by an interference neighboring cell. l Interferenced traffic by others: ranking interference neighboring cells by interference traffic of an interference neighboring cell caused by other cells. l Total Interference: Interference neighboring cells are ranked based on the sum of the interference traffic of other cells caused by an interference neighboring cell and the interference traffic of an interference neighboring cell caused by other cells.

Area

Planning area. You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter and select only the cells to be planned in the area. If you select Full Map, all the cells on the map are to be planned. You can set filter criteria such as Direction and Match case in the Filter dialog box.

5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes the parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor window. You can refer to this section when viewing the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Cell Name

Name of an interference neighboring cell.


385



Parameter

Description

CI

ID of a cell.

Co Traffic

Co-frequency interference traffic.

Adj Traffic

Adjacent frequency interference traffic.

Interference Relation

Interference relationship. This parameter is used to determine cofrequency and adjacent frequency interference, co-frequency interference, and adjacent frequency interference based on interference probability.

5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect This section describes the parameters used for setting the TSC display effect in the TSC Display Options dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

TSC

Indicates the rendering effect for common TSCs.

Vamos TSC

Indicates the rendering effect for the VAMOS TSCs.

Selected Cell Color

Indicates the color of the source cell.

Co-TSCCell Color

Indicates the color of cells with the same TSC value as that of the source cell in the TSC planning.

Co-TSCPair Cell

Indicates the color of cells with the value of VamosMainTSC being the same as that of VamosMainTSC in the source cell in the VAMOS-based TSC planning.

Related-TSC Cell

Indicates the color of cells with the value of VamosMainTSC being the same as that of VamosSubTSC in the source cell in the VAMOS-based TSC planning.


386


6 UMTS Network Planning

6

UMTS Network Planning

About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet you network planning requirements. 6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net. 6.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 6.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 6.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


387



You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 6.8 UMTS Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one. 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios such as scrambling code check and network deployment. 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze the live network. 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements. 6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


388



6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net. Figure 6-1 shows the process of UMTS network planning. Figure 6-1 Process of UMTS network planning

Table 6-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 6-1. Table 6-1 Description of the UMTS network planning process

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project



389


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


No.

Procedure

Description

2



3



4

Adding a device


5


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters.

6


You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters.

7



8

Planning scrambling codes/ Planning neighboring cells

For details, see 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.

9

Analyzing Network Capacity Expansion/ Analyzing Measurement Reports

For details, see 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis and 6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis.

10


For details, see 6.8 UMTS Prediction.

11





390




Context l


l






Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



391





l










392



6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service, environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.

6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types You can modify the parameters of existing MIMO types. If the existing MIMO types do not meet the requirements, you can create MIMO types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed. Figure 6-3 MIMO

Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked with an asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type. For detailed description of parameters of MIMO types, see Table 6-2. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


393



Table 6-2 Parameters for setting MIMO types Parameter

Meaning

Name

Indicates the name of the MIMO.

TX_ANTENNAS

Indicates the number of transmit antennas.

RX_ANTENNAS

Indicates the number of receive antennas.

SM_SUPPORTED

Indicates whether space division multiplexing is supported.

SM_GAIN(dB)

Indicates the MIMO gain. The SM_GAIN(dB) takes effect only after the SM_SUPPORTED is selected.

Step 5 Click

to close MIMO Configuration.

----End

6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.

Context The U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing, UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, and UMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. If you need to...

Then...


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-4. 3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table 6-3.


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring to Table 6-3.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


394



Figure 6-4 New

Table 6-3 Parameters for setting UMTS services Parameter

Meaning

Name


Body Loss

Indicates the loss due to the human body.

Priority

Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Type

Indicates a service type. l CSServie: CS services. l PSServie: PS services.

Is VOIP

Indicates whether the voice over IP (VoIP) is used. This parameter is available only for the PS services.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

R99 Bearer

Indicates the R99 bearer table assigned to a service type.

Soft Handoff Allowed

Indicates whether a soft handoff is supported.

HSDPA

Indicates whether the HSDPA service is supported.

HSUPA

Indicates whether the HSUPA service is supported.


395



Parameter

Meaning

Activity

Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only voice services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.

FER(%)

This parameter is available only for the CS services. Max Throughput(kbit/s)


Min Throughput(kbit/s)


Average Throughput(kbit/ s)




IBLER(%)


Offset(kbit/s)

Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer. l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107. l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


396




6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the name of a receiver. If you need to...

Then...


Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked with *) in the dialog box. Select Bearer Selection Table.


Go to Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4. Step 6 Click OK. Table 6-4 Parameters for setting UMTS receivers Parameter

Meaning

Name


Bearer Selection Table

Indicates the bearer table.

Mobility

Indicates the mobility type of a receiver. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

MIMO


IBLER(%)


Retransmission Gain(dB)

Indicates the retransmission gain.


397



Parameter

Meaning

Demodulation

l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if this parameter is located in the PSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter. l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if this parameter is located in the CSService area. You can double-click the related cell to set this parameter.

Bearer Index

Indicates the index of the HSDPA or HSUPA bearer table.

Ec/Nt(dB)

Indicates the demodulation threshold.

----End

6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can create terminal types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type. If you need to...

Then...

Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 6-5. Modify an 1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > Existing existing terminal Terminal from the navigation tree. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Parameters for setting UMTS terminal types

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Meaning

Name


Min Tx Power(dBm)


Max Tx Power(dBm)



398



Parameter

Meaning

Gain(dBi)


Cable Loss(dB)


Compressed Mode

Indicates whether to use the compressed mode.

Noise Figure(dB)


Attenuation(dB)

Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.

Active Set Size

Indicates the threshold for the number of cells in an active set. The value ranges from 1 to 6.

Rake Factor(DL)

Indicates the efficiency factor of the Rake receiver on the downlink. The value ranges from -32768 to 32768.

Reception Equipment

Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal. For details, see 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.

Frequency Band

Indicates the frequency band.

Technology

Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.

HSDPA UE Category

Indicates the UE category supported by the HSDPA. The value range is relevant to the value range of HSDPA UE Category.

HSUPA UE Category

Indicates the UE category supported by the HSUPA. The value range is relevant to the value range of HSUPA UE Category.

Space Multiplexing Supported (DL)

Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is supported on the downlink.

Space Multiplexing Supported (UL)

Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is supported on the uplink.

Number of Reception Antennas


Number of Transmission Antennas


----End


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


399




6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA bearer table.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Description of the parameters in the HSUPA bearer table Parameter

Description

Radio Bearer Index

Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greater than 0.

TTI Duration (ms)

Indicates the duration of TTI scheduling. Its value is either 10 ms or 2 ms.

Number of EDPDCH codes

Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from 1 to 32767.

Min Spreading Factor

Indicates the minimum spreading factor. The value ranges from 2 to 32767.

Number of CEs Used

Indicates the total CEs of the bearer service.

Transport Block Size (bits)

Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer.

RLC Peak Rate (bps)

Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer.

Highest modulation

Indicates a modulation mode.

Step 5 Click

to close the table.

----End

6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA bearer table. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


400



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-7. Table 6-7 Description of the parameters in the HSDPA bearer table Parameter

Description

Index

Indicates the index.

CQI

Indicates the channel quality indicator.

Transport Block Size (bits)

Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unit is bit. The default value is 0.

Number of Used HSPDSCH Channels

Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The default value is 1.

RLC Peak Rate (bps)

Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The default value is 0.

Highest Modulation

Indicates a modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM. The default value is QPSK.

Step 5 Click

to close the table.

----End

6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table The U-Net needs to access the R99 bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the R99 bearer table.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-8. Table 6-8 Description of the parameters in the R99 bearer table

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the R99 bearer service. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401



Parameter

Description

Nominal Rate(UL)

Indicates the nominal rate of the uplink bearer service.

Nominal Rate(DL)

Indicates the nominal rate of the downlink bearer service.

Min TCH Power (dBm)

Indicates the allowed lowest power of the downlink traffic channel. The unit is dBm.

Max TCH Power (dBm)

Indicates the allowed highest power of the downlink traffic channel. The unit is dBm.

CE Used Num(UL)

Specifies the total CEs of the uplink bearer service.

CE Used Num(DL)

Specifies the total CEs of the downlink bearer service.

Spreading Factor (UL)

Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the uplink nominal rate.

Spreading Factor (DL)

Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the downlink nominal rate.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialog box. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK. NOTE

l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set. l Mobility: set mobility. l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility. l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.

Step 6 Click

to close the table.

----End

6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA UE Category table.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UE Category Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-9.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


402



Table 6-9 Description of parameters in the HSUPA UE Category table Parameter

Description

Category

Indicates the power level of the UPA terminal. The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be greater than or equal to 1.

Max Number of E-DPDCH Codes

Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.

TTI 2ms

Indicates whether to support TTI scheduling of 2 ms.

Min Spreading Factor

Indicates the minimum spreading factor.

Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Its value is greater than or equal to 1. Max Block Size for a 2ms TTI (bits)

Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during TTI scheduling of 2 ms. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Max Block Size for a 10ms TTI (bits)

Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during TTI scheduling of 10 ms. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Highest Modulation

Indicates the highest modulation mode. Its value is either QPSK or 16QAM.

Step 5 Click

to close the table.

----End

6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA UE Category table.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS. Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UE Category Table window is displayed. Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-10.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


403



Table 6-10 Description of parameters in the HSDPA UE Category table Parameter

Description

Category

Indicates the power level of the DPA terminal. The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be greater than or equal to 1.

Max Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.

Min Inter-TTI interval

Indicates the minimum interval between the TTI scheduling.

Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Its value is greater than or equal to 1. Max Transport Block Size(bits)

Indicates the maximum size of a transported block. Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Highest Modulation

Indicates the highest modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM.

MIMO Support

Step 5 Click

Indicates whether MIMO is supported.

to close the table.

----End

6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.





404




6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l


dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5.


2.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


405



Such as l

.



l

2.

Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

3.

Click OK.



2.


3.

Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End





Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details, see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


406





6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters This section describes how to set UMTS cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


407



Figure 6-6 UMTSCell


6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting UMTS NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.


Description

Name


Support Type


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


408



Parameter

Description



Hexagon Radius


Comments

Description.

Transceiver area on the UMTS tab page Parameter

Description

Transceivers


Comments

Description.

Model


Site Equipment




Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height/Ground(m)


Transmission in Number of Antennas area


Reception in Number of Antennas area


Transmission in Number of Antenna Ports area


Total Loss(DL)


Total Loss(UL)


General tab in the Cell area on the UMTS tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Max Power(dBm)


Pilot Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.

CCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.


409



Parameter

Description

Available HSDPA Power (dBm)

Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.

Actual Power(dBm)

Indicates the actual transmit power.

HS-SCCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.

Target Load(DL)


Target Load(UL)


Max Load(DL)

Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Max Load(UL)

Indicates the maximum load of HSUPA on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

SHO Threshold(dB)

Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.

SHO Reserve Ratio

Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is from 0 to 1. Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total uplink load. Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total downlink load.

Max Noise Rise

Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.

UL Rake Factor

Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Frequency Band


ARFCN

Indicates the downlink ARFCN.

Reception


Cell Type

Indicates the type of a cell. The parameter value can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA, R99AndHSUPA, or R99AndHSDPA.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


410



Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page Parameter

Description

Propagation Model


Radius(m)


Resolution(m)


Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS cell or modifying the properties of a UMTS cell. Table 6-11 Parameters on the UMTSCell tab page Parameter

Description

Name


Active


Frequency Band


ARFCN

Indicates the downlink ARFCN.

Target Load(DL)


Target Load(UL)


Cell Type

Indicates the type of a cell. The cell type can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA, R99 And HSUPA, or R99 And HSDPA.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Available HSDPA Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.

CCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.

Code Allocation Ratio

Indicates the static allocation ratio of codes of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Dynamic HSDPA Power

Indicates whether dynamically allocated power is used for the HSDPA.

HSDPA Code Allocation

Indicates the allocation mode of codes of a cell.


411



Parameter

Description

HS-SCCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.

Max Load(DL)

Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Max Noise Rise

Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.

Max Power(dBm)


Max Load(UL)

Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Pilot Power(dBm)

Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.

Power Allocation Ratio

Indicates the static power allocation ratio of a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Reception


SHO Reserve Ratio

Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is from 0 to 1. Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total uplink load. Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total downlink load.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

SHO Threshold(dB)


Actual Power(dBm)

Indicates the actual transmit power.

UL Rake Factor

Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Load Factor(UL)

Indicates the total uplink load. The value range is from 0 to 1.

HSUPA Load(UL)

Indicates the HSUPA uplink load. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Scrambling Code

Indicates the scrambling code assigned to a cell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Distance(km)

Indicates the reuse distance of a scrambling code.

Scrambling Code Reuse Tier

Indicates the number of reuse layers of a scrambling code.

Forbidden Scrambling Code

Indicates a forbidden scrambling code.

Scene


MCC



412



Parameter

Description

MNC


CI


CGI

Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).

RNC ID

Indicates the ID of an RNC.

LAC

Indicates a location area code.

RNC Name

Indicates the name of a radio network controller.

Swap Status

Indicates the swapping status.

Comments

Remarks

Neighbors list

Indicates a list of neighboring cells.

Propagation Models

Indicates a propagation model.


Description

Name


Site


Hexagon Radius(m)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)







Comments



413




Description

Antenna ID


Power Ratio


Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude


Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height(m)


RRU ID

l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.

Equipment

Equipment properties. For details, see Table 6-14.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


414




Description

Input Total Loss


Site Equipment TMA

Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.

Feeder


to


Feeder Length(m)






JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)


Total Loss(dB)


6.8 UMTS Prediction By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.

6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters The U-Net can be used to predict multiple UMTS counters. This section describes the meanings of the UMTS prediction counters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


415


6 UMTS Network Planning NOTE


Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net. Table 6-15 Description of UMTS prediction counters Category

Counter

Description


CPICH RSCP

Indicates Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).

Best Server

Indicates the best serving cell that has the highest CPICH RSCP on a specified frequency.

UE RSSI

Indicates the total receive power of a UE on the entire bandwidth.

Handover Area

Indicates whether an area is a handover area.

Pilot Pollution

Indicates the pilot pollution

Number Of Service

Indicates the number of cells that can be added to the active set.

DL Noise Rise

Indicates the downlink noise rise.

Ec/Io

CPICH Ec/Io

Indicates the Ec/Io of the pilot signal received by a UE.

Eb/Nt(UL)

UL DPCH Eb/Nt

Indicates the Eb/Nt of the uplink DPCH.

Eb/Nt(DL)

DL DPCH Eb/Nt

Indicates the Eb/Nt of the downlink DPCH.

HSDPA Coverage

HS PDSCH Ec/Nt

Indicates the Ec/Nt of the signals received on the HSPDSCH.

HSDPA CQI

Indicates the HSDPA channel quality indicator.

HSDPA Peak Throughput

Indicates the HSDPA peak throughput.

E DPDCH Ec/Nt

Indicates the Eb/Nt of the E-DPDCH.

HSUPA Peak Throughput

Indicates the HSUPA peak throughput.

Coverage Area Analysis

HSUPA Coverage


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


416




UMTS Prediction Algorithm By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. This section describes the UMTS prediction algorithm through a schematic chart. Figure 6-8 shows the schematic chart of the UMTS prediction algorithm.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


417



Figure 6-8 UMTS prediction algorithm

Table 6-16 describes the processes shown in Figure 6-8. Table 6-16 Description of the UMTS prediction algorithm Procedur e

Operation

Description

1


Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are activated. If a cell is not activated, the counters of this cell are not calculated.

2


l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the path loss matrix. l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be obtained directly.

3

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)




418



Procedur e

Operation

Description

4

Predicting slow fading by using the shadow fading margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with a certain probability. A certain amount of power of the base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved power is called shadow fading margin. During the calculation of link loss, you can enable the U-Net to take the shadow fading margin into account.

5

Calculating the CPICH RSCP to determine the primary serving cell

CPICH RSCP indicates the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH). It is an important counter used for prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell based on this counter.

6

Calculating the power of interference noise to determine the handover area.

You can calculate the power of interference and noise and determine the handover area.

7

Calculating counters of traffic channels and common channels based on the Bin points

You must calculate the mandatory counters and custom counters based on the BIN.

8





l



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


419




Meaning









Path loss


Shadow fading


Penetration loss







Prerequisites l


l


Context You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


420



l


l



Then...

Calculate


Calculate forcibly





Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


421




----End



Context l


l


l


l


l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


422




Then ...





NOTE



6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Prerequisites l


l


l




2.


3.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


423



4.


5.


6.

Click OK.


Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of parameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups. Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


424



Procedure l


l


----End




2.


3.




2.




2.


3.



4.


5.


----End

Example This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison. The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt. 1. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

425



2.


3.


4.


5.





l


l


6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.

Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.

Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.

Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.

Procedure l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

1.


2.

Select the objects to be exported. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426



l

If...

Then...





3.


4.


5.

Click Export.

Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a Bin point within the range. 1.


2.


Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.

NOTE

You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.

3.

Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu. – When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing prediction calculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. – The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.

4.

In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator. The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified range.

5. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Click Export. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

427



l

Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable only to single-mode networks. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.

3.

Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.

4.

Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N records to be exported.

5.

Click Export.

6.

After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data. NOTE

l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCP when you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12. l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This value specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.

Figure 6-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


428



Figure 6-12 Indicator selection

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


429



Figure 6-13 Property setting

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The exported contents mainly include: l


l

Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.

Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.

Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


430




Prerequisites l

The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or created.

l

The coverage prediction for CPICH RSCP is complete.

l

The DT data file has been imported.

Context The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.


Context For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point.

6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.

6.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


431



The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




Prerequisites l


l


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


432



Context l


l


l





6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network This section describes how to perform neighboring cell planning for a new network. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. This function helps to plan the neighboring cells for each cell automatically, which reduces the number of handover problems due to improper neighboring cell configuration.

Prerequisites Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

Context On a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are planned initially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cell planning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-14. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


433




Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells. Step 5 Click Run. NOTE

You can right-click UMTS and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation from the shortcut menu to stop the current neighboring cell planning.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End




2.

In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.

3.


4.


5.

Click OK.

After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.

6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network This section describes how to replan neighboring cells for an expanded network. The capacity of a network may reach a limit after the network works for a long period of time. Therefore, the network needs to be expanded. The neighboring cells in the expanded areas and adjacent areas need to be replanned. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


434



Prerequisites Base station information has been created or imported, including network information before the expansion and added site information after the expansion.

Procedure Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select the Update Blind Handover Flag check box as required. If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when neighboring cell relationships are being imported.

5.

Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file. NOTE

l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationships that are in the Added and No Change status. l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells and neighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.

6.

Click OK.

Step 2 Set neighboring cell replanning parameters. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-15. Figure 6-15 Neighbor Automatic Allocation

4.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

435



5.

Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration. ----End

6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network This section describes how to plan neighboring cells on a 3G network based on neighboring cell information on the 2G network after creating a 3G network.

Prerequisites l

A GSM/UMTS network has been created.

l

Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G network and 3G network have been imported respectively.

Context The coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses of sites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cells on the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.

Procedure Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.

3.

Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.

5.

Click OK.

Step 2 Set planning parameters. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


436




4.

Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.

5.

Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration. ----End

6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration This section describes how to check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. When the neighboring cell planning in a scenario is complete, you can view, modify, apply, export, filter, and collect the neighboring cell planning data. Based on the result of neighboring cell planning, you can create neighboring cell planning scripts and check missing neighboring cell relationships.



You need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


437



Figure 6-17 Selecting the RAT


Then...



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


438



If you need to...

Then...

Manually adjust neighboring cell relationships

1. Select a source cell on the map. 2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships. 3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. NOTE l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as an existing one, the check box in the Confirm column of the neighboring cell list is automatically selected or cleared. l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the neighboring cell list and force is displayed in the Cause column. l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.




1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export.


1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted. 2. Clear the check boxes in the Confirm column for the selected cells in the table in the right pane.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


439



If you need to...

Then...

Filter neighboring cell relationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the shortcut menu.. 2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations. 3. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as shown in Figure 6-19. NOTE If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.


Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the right pane switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.


1. In the Cell area of the main window, rightclick the table and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu. 2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details, see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells. 3. Click OK. The neighboring cell relationship check report is exported to an XLS file. The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


440



If you need to...

Then...

Check missing neighboring cell relationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select Incremental Export. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. Check the status of exported neighboring cell relationships. The neighboring cell relationships in the Added state are missing neighboring cell relationships.

Clear the neighboring cell planning result

1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-20. 2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing neighboring cell relationships are cleared. NOTE You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


441




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


442



Figure 6-19 Filter

Figure 6-20 clear existed neighbors

NOTE

You can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The UNet is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under different RNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in the RNCID column in the table in the Cell area.

----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


443



6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios such as scrambling code check and network deployment.

6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning This section describes basic knowledge of scrambling code planning. The scrambling code planning is performed to allocate a primary scrambling code for each cell and different scrambling codes for the cells adjacent to this cell. The scrambling code planning ensures that no interference is generated between downlink signals of cells that are allocated the same frequency and scrambling code. Scrambling codes in the UMTS system are classified into uplink scrambling codes and downlink scrambling codes. Uplink scrambling codes are classified into long scrambling codes and short scrambling codes. The uplink scrambling codes are allocated randomly by the RNC for differentiating users. Therefore, the planning of uplink scrambling codes is not required. Downlink scrambling codes are used on UEs. Only long scrambling codes are used for differentiating cells. Downlink scrambling codes are divided into 512 groups. Each group consists of 16 scrambling codes. The first scrambling code in each group is the primary scrambling code. The other 15 scrambling codes in the same group are secondary scrambling codes. Secondary scrambling codes must be used together with the primary scrambling code. Figure 6-21 shows the procedure for scrambling code planning.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


444



Figure 6-21 Procedure for scrambling code planning

The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the following scenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure. l

6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network

l

6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


445



Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization

6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan scrambling codes for a simple new network by setting the rules of reusing scrambling codes.

Context On the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tier reuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net also provides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, and customized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on cell types.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


446



l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete. l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage of scrambling codes. l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.

Procedure Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.

3.

Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Step 3 Choose Set Scrambling Code Resource from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Set Scrambling Code Resource

Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Step 7 Choose Automatic Identify High-Site from the shortcut menu. Step 8 After the Height of High-Site is set, click Identify. The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normal cells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of the other cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


447



The Scene parameter in cell properties indicates the scenario of a cell. Step 9 Click OK. Step 10 Repeat Step 2. Step 11 Choose Scanning from the shortcut menu to check the usage of any scrambling code in cells of the entire network. Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, set the value of Scrambing Code from the drop-down list box. The value range is from 0 to 511. Step 13 Repeat Step 2. Step 14 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 15 Set parameters in the displayed Scrambling Code Plan dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes. Step 16 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window.. For details, see 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes . NOTE

You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planning from the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.

----End

6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration After UMTS scrambling codes are planned, you can view, manually adjust, apply, export, filter, and collect statistics about the planning results.

Prerequisites UMTS scrambling codes have been planned.

Context The scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as network expansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checked periodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling code planning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reuse tier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbs and rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.

Procedure Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceed to Step 2. Step 2 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


448



Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Perform the following operations as required. If you need to...

Then...

Enable geographic display of scrambling codes

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. 3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed. 4. On the Label Display tab page, add Scrambling Code to the Selected Fields area.

Enable the cells using the same scrambling code as that of the selected cell in the planning result table to be displayed on the map

1. In the navigation tree, select UMTS Scrambling Code Planning. 2. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu. 3. In the displayed Scrambling Code Display Option dialog box, set the mode and color for geographic display of scrambling codes. l Co Scrambling Code Cell: sets the color for the cells that use the same scrambling code with that of the selected cell. l Selected Cell Color: sets a color for the selected cell. l Link: identifies the scrambling code planning results by lines. l Cell: sets the color of the line corresponding to the scrambling code planning results. 4. Click OK. 5. Select a cell on the map or click a row heading in the planning result table. The cells that use the same scrambling code as that of the selected cell are displayed on the map at the same time.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Manually adjust scrambling codes

In the result window, change the values of Confirm Code.

Apply the planning results

Right-click in the result window and choose Commit from the shortcut menu to submit the values of Confirm Code for all cells to NEs.


449



If you need to...

Then...

Export the planning file of scrambling codes

Right-click in the result window and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the scrambling code planning results as a file. For details about the parameters, see Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.

Export MML script planning file for the scrambling codes

Export the scrambling code planning result data for generating the MML script file.

Collect statistics about the usage of scrambling codes

1. Right-click in the result window and choose Graphic Result from the shortcut menu. 2. In the Graphic Result window, set parameters. For details about the parameters, see Table 6-18. graphic and data areas display the statistical results. You can double-click a column heading in the table in the data area to sort the results.

Filter scrambling code planning results

1. Right-click in the result window and choose Filter from the shortcut menu. 2. Specify a cell range from the Filter Target drop-down list in the displayed dialog box. All indicates all the cells on the entire network, and Planning indicates the cells in the planning area. 3. Select filter parameters. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results. 4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the downlink ARFCN. NOTE If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to set it.

5. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed green on the map. NOTE If you set the filtering criterion to None in the Filter dialog box, the color of the filtered cells on the map is cleared.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


450



If you need to...

Then...

Remove the filter effect

Right-click in the result window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The Scrambling Code Display window switches back to the status when no filter criterion was used in Filter, and the color of cells is cleared. NOTE Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are set in Filter.

Check the scrambling code planning results

1. Right-click in the result window and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. 2. Specify a cell range from the Audit Target drop-down list in the displayed dialog box. All indicates all the cells on the entire network, and Planning indicates the cells in the planning area. 3. Select one or more statistical parameters. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results. 4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the downlink ARFCN. NOTE If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to set it.

Clear the scrambling code planning results

1. Right-click in the result window and choose Clear Existed Scrambling Code from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-24. 2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes (Y). The existing scrambling code planning results on NEs are cleared. NOTE After the planned scrambling codes are cleared, the new scrambling code planning will not be affected.

Table 6-18 Parameters in the Graphic Result window

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Main ARFCN

Sets the downlink ARFCN.

Use Times

Collects statistics based on the number of times scrambling codes are reused.

Min Reuse Distance(km)

Collects statistics based on the reuse distances of scrambling codes.


451



Parameter

Description

Min Reuse Tier

Collects statistics based on the reuse tiers of scrambling codes.

Cell Type

Sets the cell type. l Indicates the type of a cell (All, Indoor, High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Normal, Special, Outdoor, and Boundary). l This parameter is available only when Use times is selected.

Figure 6-24 Clear Existed Scrambling Code

----End

6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze the live network.

6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group This section describes how to create a measurement report analysis group and modify the group attributes. The U-Net can analyze measurement report analysis groups. Each measurement report analysis group contains one or multiple analysis items.

Prerequisites l

You have imported geographic data.

l

NodeBs are available.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


452



l


Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report. Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-25. Figure 6-25 New

Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the data source for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group. Step 5 Click OK to create a new measurement report analysis group. ----End


Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate the measurement report analysis group.

l

Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating the measurement report analysis group.

6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results After calculating a measurement report analysis group, you can create network counters in the measurement report analysis group to view the live network analysis results displayed in color rendering mode in the map window.

Prerequisites l

You have created a measurement report analysis group.

l

You have calculated the measurement report analysis group.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


453



Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysis group. Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-26. Figure 6-26 New

Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


454



Figure 6-27 Measure Report Study Types

Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create measurement report analysis counters. NOTE

After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the counters are geographically displayed in the map window.

----End

6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.

6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics This section describes how to use the U-Net to perform network capacity expansion analysis. Before expanding the network capacity, you can use the U-Net to analyze the impacts of network capacity expansion on coverage and capacity and then adopt a proper expansion policy and determine the number of required resources. NOTE

The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.

Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


455



Figure 6-28 Flow chart

6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group This section describes how to create a capacity expansion analysis group and modify the group attributes. The U-Net performs network capacity expansion analysis based on analysis groups. Each analysis group contains one or more analysis items.

Prerequisites l


l

NodeBs are available.

l


Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree. Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-29. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


456



Figure 6-29 New

Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a data source and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers and MR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group. Step 5 Click OK or Apply to create a network capacity expansion analysis group. ----End


Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate the capacity expansion analysis group.

l

Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating the capacity expansion analysis group. NOTE

l l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and the selected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size, computation area, and expansion policy complexity.

6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results After calculating a capacity expansion analysis group, you can create network counters in the capacity expansion analysis group to view the analysis results displayed in color rendering mode in the map window.

Prerequisites l

You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.

l

You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.

Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


457



Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis group. Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-30. Figure 6-30 New

Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown in Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


458



Figure 6-31 Expansion Study Types

NOTE

You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.

Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create capacity expansion counter analysis items. NOTE

After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographically displayed in the map window.

----End

6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results This section describes how to check network capacity expansion results after calculating a capacity expansion analysis group. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


459



Prerequisites l

You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.

l

You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.

Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis group. Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 6-32. Figure 6-32 Result

Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results. ----End

6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


460



6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.


Description

Group Name


Prediction Type

Prediction type.

Study Selected

Prediction counter.

Calculate Now


Parameters in the UMTS Group Properties Dialog Box Table 6-19 Parameters on the General tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name


Resolution(m)


Polygon

Indicates the area calculated in prediction.



With Shadow


Indoor Coverage


DLFrequencyBand

Indicates the downlink frequency band.

ARFCN

Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN).


461




Description

Signal Level(dBm)

Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink reference signal.

Terminal


Service

Indicates a service type.

Mobility


Table 6-21 Parameters on the Advance tab page Parameter

Description

DLDivGain

Indicates the downlink diversity gain.

MacroDivGain

Indicates the macro diversity gain.

MaxSpatialMultiplexingFactor

Indicates the maximum spatial diversity gain.

MinCPICHEcIo

Indicates the threshold of the minimum signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR).

OrthoFactor

Indicates the orthogonal factor.

PilotEcIoMargin

Indicates the minimum SINR of the pilot signal.

PilotPollutionMargin

Indicates the threshold of pilot pollution.

SHOThreshold


SpatialMultiplexingFactor

Indicates the spatial diversity gain.

TopNSignalLevel

Indicates the number of top receive levels to be ranked.

ULDivGain

Indicates the uplink diversity gain.

6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells This section describes the parameters for planning neighboring UMTS cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


462




Description

Methods Select

Selects a network planning scenario. l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on network topology. l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction results. This method is applicable only to outdoor base stations. l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on both the network topology and the prediction results.






Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m)

Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when the distance between the two cells is less than the value of this parameter.


Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existing cells.

Azimuth Difference (°)

Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned and the cells used for reference.

Reference Site Distance(m)

Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned and the referenced cell.

Consider Handover Statistics

Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for saving the handover data.

Planning Weight

Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell ranking.

Handover Statistics Weight

Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell ranking.

Resolution(m)


Handover Area Percent(%)

Indicates the handover area proportion. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


463



Parameter

Description

Compute Shadowing

Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.


Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter is valid only when shadow fading is considered in the calculation. The value of the parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadow fading. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.

Compute Indoor Loss

Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation. This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.





Area

Indicates the planning area. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. By default, the full map is planned. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases. l Comments: Users can filter cells based on the information defined in Comments.

Table 6-23 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description


Indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.




464



Parameter

Description

Force Symmetry


Table 6-24 Parameters on the Inter-Frequency tab page Parameter

Description


Indicates the maximum number of indoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency Config

Indicates frequency band parameters and handover modes.

Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring cell planning) Parameter

Description

SourceNetType

Indicates the network system that the source cell belongs to.

To

Indicates the network system that the cells to be planned belong to. NOTE If the RAT is switched to GSM, you can set the frequency band to be switched to.


Indicates the minimum signal receive level.



Max Number


6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


465




Description

Display Links


Display Cell Color




Selected Cell Color






Inter-RAT Neighbors




Table 6-27 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Legend

Description

Intra Frequency


Inter Frequency


Inter-RAT


Intra Technology






Paired Inter-RAT




Add To Legend


Transparency



466




6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 6-28 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells Parameter

Description

Source Cell


Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Intra-Technology


Inter-RAT




Empty List


Missing Co-Site


Missing Symmetry


List > No:




Same PCI


None





Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


467



6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Table 6-29 Tab page description Parameter

Description

Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Inter-RAT



Description

Neighbor Name


Cause


Confirm



6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes This section describes the parameters for planning UMTS scrambling codes.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


468



Table 6-31 Parameters on the Group Strategy tab page Parameter

Description

Vertical(64 codes per group)

Indicates that vertical grouping is used. Each group consists of 64 scrambling codes and there are a total of 8 groups.

Horizontal(8 codes per group)

Indicates that horizontal grouping is used. Each group consists of 8 scrambling codes and there are a total of 64 groups.

512 Codes(512 codes per group)

Indicates that all the 512 scrambling codes are in one group.

Customize

Indicates that the grouping mode can be customized. You can customize the grouping mode on the Group Strategy tab page.

Reserved The Last [] Groups

Reserves the last N scrambling code groups.

Reserved The Last [] Codes Per Group

Reserves the last N scrambling codes of each group.

Reserved The Last [] Codes

Reserves the last N scrambling codes.

Available Scrambling Codes

Available scrambling codes.

Reserved Scrambling Codes

Reserved scrambling codes.

Table 6-32 Parameters on the Cell Strategy tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Cell Type

Indicates the type of a cell (Indoor, Outdoor, High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Boundary, Normal, Special).

Select Usable Group

Indicates the scrambling code groups used by the same type of cell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Tier

Indicates the number of layers for scrambling code reuse for the same type of cell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Distance

Indicates the scrambling code reuse distance for the same type of cells.


469




Description

Reuse Rule

Sets the rules for reusing scrambling codes. The value can be Distance, Tier, or Distance +Tier. The default value is Tier.

Allocate Rule

Sets the rules for allocating scrambling codes. The value can be Average or MaxUsage. The default value is MaxUsage.

Main ARFCN

Main downlink absolute radio frequency channel number.

Consecutive Allocate

Sets whether scrambling codes under one base station are allocated consecutively. If this option is selected, scrambling codes are allocated consecutively. This parameter is selected by default.

Group Different From Neighbor Site

Sets whether different scrambling code groups are allocated to neighboring base stations. If this option is selected, different scrambling code groups are allocated to neighboring base stations. This parameter is selected by default.

Allocate Different Scrambling Code for Cells in the Same Transceiver

If this option is selected, different scrambling codes are allocated to inter-frequency cells sharing sectors.

Delete Scrambling Code

Sets whether to delete the existing scrambling codes of cells. If this option is selected, the existing scrambling codes of cells are deleted.

Iteratively Generate Scrambling Code

Sets whether to generate scrambling codes by iterations. If scrambling codes fail to be allocated to cells when this parameter is selected, you can reduce the reuse distance by iteration based on the step defined by Distance Decending Percentage(%) to allocate scrambling codes until the allocation is successful.

Distance Decending Percentage(%)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Sets the percentage of the step for reducing the scrambling code reuse distance.


470



Parameter

Description

Area

Selects the area where scrambling codes need to be planned. l You can select all the cells in an area or click Cell Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area. l If you select certain cells to plan the scrambling codes, the U-Net plans the scrambling codes for the selected cells by taking into account the existing scrambling codes allocation of other cells. l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases. l Comments: Users can filter cells based on the information defined in Comments.

6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes This section describes the parameters for viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling codes. You can refer to this section when viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling codes in the Scrambling Code Display dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Cell Name


Existing Code

Indicates the existing scrambling code.

Suggest Code

Indicates the scrambling codes that are recommended for setting.

Confirm Code

Indicates the scrambling codes whose settings are confirmed.

Use Times

Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the number of times a scrambling code is reused.

Min Reuse Distance(km)

Indicates that the statistical information is collected by scrambling code reuse distance.

Min Reuse Tier

Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the number of layers a scrambling code is reused.


471



6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing scrambling code planning results. Table 6-34 Parameters for filtering or auditing scrambling code planning results Parameter

Description

None

Indicates that no filter criterion is applied.

Allocation Failed Cells

Indicates the cells for which scrambling code allocation fails.

No Allocation Cells

Indicates the cells that are not allocated with scrambling codes.

Reuse Tier <=

Indicates the cells for which the number of scrambling code reuse layers is less than the specified value. A UARFCN must be specified.

Reuse Distance(km) <=

Indicates the cells for which the scrambling code reuse distance is less than the specified value. A UARFCN must be specified.

Using Reserved Code

Indicates the cells that use reserved scrambling codes. A UARFCN must be specified.

Using Forbidden Code

Indicates the cells that use forbidden scrambling codes.

Using Non-continuous Code

Indicates the co-site and intra-frequency cells that do not use consecutive scrambling codes in the same scrambling code group. A UARFCN must be specified.

Using Same Group with Neighbor Site

Indicates the cells that use the same scrambling code group as the adjacent sites. A UARFCN must be specified.

ARFCN

Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number.


Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the map or not.

6.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands This section describes the parameters used for setting the frequency band information about the UMTS. Table 6-35 Parameters for setting frequency band information

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Value

Name


-


472



Parameter

Description

Value

UARFCN(UL)

Uplink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.


UARFCN(DL)

Downlink UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.


Frequency(UL)(MHz)


Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(UL)s.

Frequency(DL)(MHz)


Unit: MHz. Value range: real numbers, separated by semicolons. The number is consistent with that of UARFCN(DL)s.

ACIR



6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group This section describes the parameters for creating a measurement report (MR) analysis group.

Parameters in the UMTS Measure Report dialog box

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Remarks

Name

Name of a MR analysis group.

-


473



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Polygon

Computation area.

l If there is no computation area, you can create a polygon through

.

l The computation area size affects the MR analysis efficiency. To obtain analysis results quickly, you need to draw a proper computation area. Path of the MR data to be selected.

-

Parameter

Description

Remarks

Configuration File

Column configuration file that is imported into an MR file.

Select a column to be imported and save it as a configuration file. Next time when you import the MR file, you only need to directly import the configuration file.

Path

Config Columns dialog box

This parameter is set based on site requirements.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

1st.Data Row

Row in an MR file from which data is imported.


Longitude

Longitude.

This parameter is mandatory.

Latitude

Latitude.


RNC ID

ID of an RNC to which a cell belongs.


Cell ID

ID of a cell.


Cell MR Count

Number of MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.


Cell Average RSCP

Average RSCP of all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.


Cell Average EcIo

Average EcIo value of all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.



474



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Cell IMSI Count

Number of IMSIs contained in all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.

This parameter is optional.

6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results This section describes the parameters for geographically displaying measurement report analysis results.

Parameters in the Measure Report Study Types dialog box Parameter

Description

RSCP analysis

Geographically displays the received signal code power (RSCP) for the primary serving cell of each grid.

EcIo analysis

Geographically displays the EcIo value for the primary serving cell of each grid.

User count analysis

Geographically displays the number of users of each grid.

Cell coverage area analysis

Geographically displays the cell coverage area.

LAC area analysis

Geographically displays the coverage area of cells with the same LAC.

RNC area analysis

Geographically displays the coverage area of cells under the same RNC.

Single Cell RSCP analysis

Geographically displays the RSCP for a single cell of each grid.

Single Cell EcIo analysis

Geographically displays the EcIo value for a single cell of each grid.

Single Cell User count analysis

Geographically displays the number of users of a single cell of each grid.

6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS network capacity expansion analysis group in the Network Expansion Analysis dialog box. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


475



Network Expansion Analysis dialog box Table 6-36 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Remarks

Name

Name of a capacity expansion analysis item.

-

Computation Area

Computation area.

l If there is no computation area, you can create a polygon through . l The computation area size affects the capacity expansion analysis efficiency. To obtain analysis results quickly, you need to draw a proper computation area.

Table 6-37 Parameters on the DataSource tab page Parameter

Description

Remarks

Measure Report

Select a data source.

The U-Net currently supports only MRs as the data source.

Path

Path of the MR data to be selected.

-

Table 6-38 Parameters on the Strategy tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Remarks

Add Sector

Select a capacity expansion mode.

The U-Net currently supports only the capacity expansion policy of adding sectors.

Site Name

Name of a site.

-

Transceiver

Name of a transceiver.

-

Cell Name

Name of a cell.

The U-Net differentiates between split cells and original cells by cell name.

CI

Identity of a cell, which is unique within an area.

The ID of a new split cell must be different from that of the cell before splitting.

Antenna

Antenna of a cell.

A split cell uses the split directional antenna.


476



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Cell Comments

Comments for a cell.

-

Table 6-39 Parameters on the Parameter tab page Parameter

Description

Remarks

Min RSCP Threshold (dBm)

Minimum RSCP threshold.

This parameter is used for calculating cells of the UE's active set for each grid.

The default value is -110 dBm.

RSCP Margin(dB)

RSCP margin. The default value is 6 dB.

Other cells can be added to the UE's active set only when the RSCPs of the cells in the current position exceed this threshold. This parameter is used for calculating cells of the UE's active set for each grid. The cells can be added to the UE's active set only when the differences (absolute value) between the RSCPs of other cells in this position and the RSCP of the primary serving cell are less than or equal to the parameter value.

ActiveSet Size

Size of a UE's active set.

All the cells that meet conditions of Min RSCP Threshold and RSCP Margin can be added to the active set. If the number of cells that meet the conditions exceed the value of ActiveSet Size, the exceeded number of cells cannot be added to the active set and these cells are considered as pilot pollution cells.

Measure Report Duration(s)

Period for reporting MRs.

This parameter is used for calculating traffic based on the number of MRs.

Cell MR Percent Threshold

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

The default value is 12 seconds. Cell MR percentage threshold.

You can configure this parameter based on site requirements. If MR data records of multiple cells exist on a grid and the percentage of the number of MR data records of a cell to the total number of MR records on the grid is less than this threshold, the cell does not participate in the calculation of the grid.


477



Config Columns dialog box Parameter

Description

Remarks

Configuration File

Column configuration file that is imported into an MR file.

Select a column to be imported and save it as a configuration file. Next time when you import the MR file, you only need to directly import the configuration file. This parameter is set based on site requirements.

1st.Data Row

Row in an MR file from which data is imported.


Longitude

Longitude.


Latitude

Latitude.


RNC ID

ID of an RNC to which a cell belongs.


Cell ID

ID of a cell.


Cell MR Count

Number of MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.


Cell Average RSCP

Average RSCP of all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.


Cell Average EcIo

Average EcIo value of all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.


Cell IMSI Count

Number of IMSIs contained in all MRs for a cell with a specific longitude and latitude.

This parameter is optional.

6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results This section describes the counters used for geographically analyzing the capacity expansion effect.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


478



Expansion Study Types dialog box Counter

Description

RSCP

Geographically displays the received signal code power (RSCP) for the primary serving cell of each grid.

EcIo

Geographically displays the EcIo value for the primary serving cell of each grid.

RSSI

Geographically displays the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) value of each grid.

Best Server

Geographically displays the primary serving cell of each grid.

Pilot Pollution

Geographically displays the number of pilot pollution sources of each grid. NOTE The number of pilot pollution sources refers to the number of cells that meet handover conditions and exceed the UE active set threshold of each grid.

Handover Area

Geographically displays the soft handover status of each grid. Soft handover grids are the grids for which the number of cells that meet handover conditions does not exceed the active set threshold.

6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results This section describes the parameters for viewing the network capacity expansion results. Table 6-40 Parameters on the Site tab page Parameter

Description

Site Name

Name of a site.

CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang)

CS traffic of a site before the network capacity expansion.

CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang)

CS traffic of a site after the network capacity expansion.

CS Traffic Variation

CS traffic change of a site after the network capacity expansion. CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion CS Traffic Before Expansion

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


479



Table 6-41 Parameters on the Transceiver tab page Parameter

Description

Splitted

Indicates whether cells are split. True: Cells are split. False: Cells are not split.

Old Transceiver Name

Name of a transceiver before splitting.

New Transceiver Name

Name of a transceiver after splitting. NOTE When Splitted of a cell is set to False, no new cell is split.

CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang)

CS traffic of a transceiver before the network capacity expansion.

CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang)

CS traffic of a transceiver after the network capacity expansion.

CS Traffic Variation

CS traffic change of a transceiver after the network capacity expansion. CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion CS Traffic Before Expansion

Transceiver Name

Name of a split transceiver.

CS Traffic(Erlang)

CS traffic of a split transceiver.

Table 6-42 Parameters on the Cell tab page Parameter

Description

Status

Indicates whether a cell is a split one.

Cell Name

Name of a cell.

CS Traffic(Erlang)

CS traffic of a split cell.

SHO Ratio

Soft handover ratio of a split cell.

SHO Overhead

Soft handover overhead of a split cell.

Table 6-43 Parameters on the SHO Ratio tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Cell Name

Name of a source cell.

Cell ID

ID of a source cell.

RNC ID

ID of the RNC to which the source cell belongs.


480


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


Parameter

Description

Dest CellName

Name of the destination cell where the handover is performed.

Dest CellID

ID of the destination cell where the handover is performed.

Dest RNCID

ID of the RNC to which the destination cell where the handover is performed belongs.

SHO Ratio

Ratio of soft handovers.


481


7 CDMA Network Planning

7

CDMA Network Planning

About This Chapter This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes. 7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning This section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net. 7.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 7.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 7.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 7.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


482



After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one. 7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality. 7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


483



7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning This section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net. Figure 7-1 shows the process of CDMA network planning. Figure 7-1 Process of CDMA network planning

Table 7-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 7-1. Table 7-1 Description of the CDMA Network Planning Process

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project


2


You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.


484



No.

Procedure

Description

3


The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.

4

Adding a device

You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

5


You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. For details, see 7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters.

6

Planning PN codes/ Planning neighboring cells

For details, see 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes and 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells. The planning results can be applied to NEs.


Context l


l


Procedure Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


485



Figure 7-2 Project Templates







l



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


486








Context The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.

7.6.1 Importing Base Station Information You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in the same way. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


487






7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l


Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on the toolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.

2.

The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates. Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default. The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the drop-down list. For example,

l

.



l

2.

Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.

3.

Click OK.



2.


3.

View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


488










7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set cell parameters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


489



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell. For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters This section describes the parameters for setting CDMA NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.


Description

Name


Support Type




Hexagon Radius


Comments

Description.

Transceiver Area on the CDMA Tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Transceivers


Comments

Description.

Model

Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.

Site Equipment



490



Parameter

Description



Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height/Ground(m)


Total Loss(DL)


Total Loss(UL)


Cell Area on the CDMA Tab Page Parameter

Description

Frequency Band


Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells This section describes the parameters for creating or modifying the properties of a CDMA cell. Table 7-2 Parameters on the CDMACell tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Name


Active


Frequency Band


Channel Index


MSC ID

Indicates the number of a mobile switching center (MSC) on the live network.

BSC ID

Indicates the number of a base station controller (BSC) on the live network.

BTS ID

Indicates the number of a base station on the live network.

Cell ID

Indicates the number of a cell on the live network.

Sector ID

Indicates the number of an antenna.

PN

Indicates the PN code assigned to a cell.


491



Parameter

Description

N*PN INC

Indicates the base of a PN code. The number of assigned PN codes is the multiple of the base.

PN GROUP

Indicates a PN code group.

Scene


Neighbors list

Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button. Intra-frequency Neighbors indicates a list of intrafrequency neighboring cells.

Comment

Remarks.


Description

Name


Site


Hexagon Radius(m)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)







Comments



492




Description

Antenna ID


Power Ratio


Sector ID


Dx(m)


Dy(m)


Longitude


Latitude


Main Antenna


Azimuth


Antenna


Mechanical Downtilt


Electrical Downtilt


Height(m)


RRU ID

l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU). l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0. l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can configure only one cell for this transceiver.

Equipment

Equipment properties. For details, see Table 7-5.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


493




Description

Input Total Loss


Site Equipment TMA

Indicates the site equipment. Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click modify its properties.

Feeder


to


Feeder Length(m)






JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)


Total Loss(dB)


7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network. You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each cell one by one.

7.7.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


494



Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l


l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




Prerequisites l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


495



l


l


l


l


Context




7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.

Prerequisites l


l


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA. Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


496



Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see 7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells. Step 5 Click Run. After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results. ----End


l



2.

In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.

3.


4.


5.

Click OK.

You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details, see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.

7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.




Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


497



If you need to...

Then...










Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



498



If you need to...

Then...


1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu.. 2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.







Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


499



If you need to...

Then...




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


500



Figure 7-4 Filter

----End

7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.

7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes Similar to the noise sequence, the pseudo-random number (or PN code) is a type of periodical binary sequence that seems to be random but actually is regular.

Significance of PN Code Planning In the CDMA system, the sectors are differentiated by PN code phase offset. The PN code offset phases are limited, and a maximum of 512 phases can be used. Therefore, PN code offset needs to be planned. If the reuse distance of PN code offset is too short or the propagation delay is too long, the propagation of the pilot signals in the air is delayed, compared with the terminal. If the transmission delay of pilot signals between two cells just compensates for the PN code time offset, errors occur when the terminal traces pilot signals. If an error occurs during the call process when the terminal identifies the system, the terminal will be handed over to incorrect cells, and call drop may occur.

PN Code Planning Scenarios The CDMA PN codes can be planned on the basis of network topology and in the following scenarios: co-PN RRU networking, co-deployment of outdoor macro base stations, indoor micro base stations, and remote RRUs, and repeater networking. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


501



The PN code planning is applicable to expanded networks or new networks.

7.8.2 Planning PN Codes This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan PN codes. You must import a PN group before using this function.

Prerequisites PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning. Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net. Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2. Step 7 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes. Step 9 Click Run. After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results. ----End


Apply planning results to NEs. Right-click in the PN Display dialog box, and choose Commit to apply the planning results. The new PN codes overwrite the existing PN codes.

l

Show PN code relationships for sectors on the GIS. 1.

In the navigation tree, select the box in front of PN Planning.

2.

On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table. The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.

7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results You can filter PN code planning results by specifying a threshold. This helps you to easily locate the base stations and cells that do not meet the specified thresholds.

Prerequisites PN code planning is complete. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


502



Procedure l

Set criteria for checking PN code planning results. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.

3.

Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display dialog box is displayed.

4.

In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit Form dialog box is displayed.

5.

Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select multiple check criteria at a time. Table 7-6 Conditions for checking PN codes Parameter

Description

Data Source

Indicates the data source. l Existing: The PN codes already exist. l Suggest: The data after PN code planning is not applied to NEs.

6. l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Min Distance

Indicates the minimum reuse distance.

Min Layer

Indicates the minimum number of reuse layers.

Min Score

Indicates the minimum reuse score.

Distance Scope (km)

Indicates the reuse distance scope.

Layer Scope

Indicates the reuse layer scope.

Score Scope

Indicates the reuse score scope.

Neighbour sectors used the same PN code

Indicates that the same PN codes exist between neighboring cells.

Click OK to export a check report.

Perform a 1way-2way check. 1.


2.


3.

Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Check from the shortcut menu. The 1Way-2Way Check dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-7.


503



Table 7-7 1way-2way check criteria

5. l

Parameter

Description

ARFCN

Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN).

Check 1-way Problem

Indicates that the 1-way check is performed.

Check 2-way Problem

Indicates that the 2-way check is performed.

Base on Existed Neighbor and PN

Indicates that the check is based on the data on the existing network.

Base on Planned Neighbor and PN

Indicates that the check is based on the planning results.

Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.

Filter 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships. 1.


2.


3.

Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.

4.

On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from the shortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.

5.

Set the filter conditions by referring to Table 7-8. Table 7-8 Conditions for filtering 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships

6. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Distance threshold between source cell and its neighbor cell(km) >=:

Indicates that the distance between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.

Angle threshold of its neighbor cell relative to source cell >=:

Indicates that the angle between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.

Angle threshold of source cell relative to its neighbor cell >=:

Indicates that the angle between the neighboring cell and the source cell exceeds the predefined value.

Layer threshold between source cell and its neighbor cell >=:

Indicates that the number of layers between the source cell and its neighboring cell exceeds the predefined value.

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

504


7 CDMA Network Planning NOTE

In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships are displayed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete the corresponding data item.

7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes This section describes how to set the display properties of PN codes on the U-Net. You can set to display cells with identical or adjacent PN codes or set colors and contrast for the cells with identical or adjacent PN codes, helping you view the planning result of PN codes.

Prerequisites PN code planning is complete.

Procedure Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window. Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu. See Figure 7-5. Figure 7-5 Display Option

Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


505



7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the U-Net.

7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes This section describes the parameters for planning PN codes. You can refer to this section when viewing PN code planning results in the CDMA PN Plan Setting dialog box. Parameter

Description

Delete Existed PN

Indicates whether to delete the existing PN codes.

Rhombus AngleA:

Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is less than 5 km.

Rhombus AngleB:

Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 5 km but less than 10 km.

Rhombus AngleC:

Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 10 km but less than 20 km.

Rhombus AngleD:

Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than 20 km.

POI

Indicates whether indoor and outdoor cells use the same PN group. TRUE: The same PN group is used. FALSE: Different PN groups are used.

PM

TRUE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated to only the cells with the same geographic location (within the distance specified by MAXDIST_ALLOWED) under the same base station. FALSE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated regardless of geographic locations.

MaxDistance

Indicates the maximum distance (km) between cells that the same PN group is allocated to.

Area

Indicates the area whose PN codes need to be planned. You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


506



7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results This section describes the parameters for viewing PN code planning results. You can refer to this section when viewing PN code planning results in the PN Display dialog box. Parameter

Description

MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector

Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID, and sector ID.

Existed PNG

Indicates the existing PN code group of the NE.

Existed PN

Indicates the existing PN codes of the NE.

Suggest PNG

Indicates the PN groups after the planning.

Suggest PN

Indicates the PN codes after the planning.

Sector Name

Indicates the name of a sector.

Scene

Indicates a scenario.

Score

Indicates the PN code reuse score. This parameter measures the PN code reuse quality.

Distance

Indicates the PN code reuse distance.

Layer

Indicates the number of layers involved in the PN code reuse.

Co-Sector

Indicates a sector that shares the PN code with the source sector.

7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. You can refer to this section when viewing and setting PN code display properties in the Display Options dialog box. Table 7-9 Parameters on the General tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Suggest

Displays PN codes in the planning result.

Existed

Displays PN codes delivered to the NE.

PN INC

Intervals between adjacent PN codes.

Same PN

Displays cells with identical PN codes.

Neighborhood PN

Displays cells with adjacent PN codes.


507



Table 7-10 Parameters on the Same PN tab page Parameter

Description

Indoor

Sets the color for indoor cells with identical PN codes.

Outdoor

Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical PN codes.

Special

Sets the color for special cells with identical PN codes.

Add To Legend

Displays neighbor relationships on the map or not.

Transparency


Table 7-11 Parameters on the Neighborhood PN tab page Parameter

Description

Indoor

Sets the color for indoor cells with identical PN codes.

Outdoor

Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical PN codes.

Special

Sets the color for special cells with identical PN codes.

Add To Legend

Displays neighbor relationships on the map or not.

Transparency


7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for planning CDMA neighboring cells. Table 7-12 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Methods Select

Selects a network planning scenario. In the CDMA network, the neighboring cells can be planned only on the basis of network topology.



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


508



Parameter

Description



Force Co-site Distance

Configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Area


Table 7-13 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page Parameter

Description

Max Neighbour Number of Indoor Cell

Indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Max Neighbour Number of Outdoor Cell


Force Symmetry


Main Frequency

Indicates the main ARFCN.

Base on Main Frequency

Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN neighboring cells are configured based on the configured main-ARFCN neighboring cell relationships. If this option is selected, the non-main-ARFCN neighboring relationship can be configured only if the main-ARFCN neighboring relationship has been configured.

Base on Topology

Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN intra-frequency neighboring cell is planned based on the topology. If this option is selected, the neighboring cell relationship can be configured regardless of whether main-ARFCN neighboring cell relationship has been configured.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


509



7.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells. Table 7-14 Parameters on the General tab page Parameter

Description

Display Links


Display Cell Color




Selected Cell Color






Inter-RAT Neighbors




Table 7-15 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Legend

Description

Intra Frequency


Inter Frequency


Inter-RAT


Intra Technology






Paired Inter-RAT





510



Legend

Description

Add To Legend


Transparency


NOTE


7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells. Table 7-16 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering neighboring cells

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Source Cell


Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Intra-Technology


Inter-RAT




Empty List


Missing Co-Site


Missing Symmetry


List > No:




Same PCI


None





511





Description

Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Inter-RAT



Description

Neighbor Name


Cause


Confirm



7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results This section describes the parameters for viewing results of 1way-2way checking Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


512



Table 7-19 Parameters on the One way resulttab page Parameter

Description

PN

Indicates the PN codes.

SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC

Indicates the three sectors with One way relations.

DistanceAB

Indicates the distance between sector A and sector B.

DistanceBC

Indicates the distance between sector B and sector C.

Table 7-20 Parameters on the Two way resulttab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

PN

Indicates the PN codes.

SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC<->SectorD

Indicates the four sectors with Two way relations.

DistanceAB

Indicates the distance between sector A and sector B.

DistanceBC

Indicates the distance between sector B and sector C.

DistanceCD

Indicates the distance between sector C and sector D.


513


8 Multi-Mode Network Planning

8

Multi-Mode Network Planning

About This Chapter The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements. 8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net. 8.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. 8.3 Importing Geographic Data You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same. 8.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 8.5 Adding a Device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


514



8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately. 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality. 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network. The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


515



8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net. Figure 8-1 shows the process of multi-mode network planning. Figure 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning

Table 8-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 8-1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


516



Table 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning No.

Procedure

Description

1

Creating a project


2



3



4

Adding a device


5


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services, which are to be used during prediction.For details, see 8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network.

6


You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters.

7



8

Planning neighboring cells

For details, see 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network. The planning results can be applied to NEs.

9


For details, see 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network.

10



8.2 Creating a Project This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


517



Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM, UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.

Context l


l







You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format, only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format, all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


518



The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path. NOTE


l










519



8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.


Context For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see 3.6.6 Setting User Types.



8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can create service types.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set service type parameters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


520



If you need to...

Then...


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > RAT. 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set new service type parameters. l For GSM networks, see Parameters for Setting the GSM Services. l For UMTS networks, see Parameters for Setting the UMTS Services. l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for Setting the LTE-FDD Services. l UnionService: see Table 8-2.


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > Network system > An existing service type. 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify service type parameters.

Table 8-2 Parameters for setting the multi-mode services Parameter

Meaning

Name


Type

Indicates a service type. l CSServie: voice services. l PSServie: data services.

AMR Rate(kbit/s)

Indicates the rate of a voice service. The unit is kbit/s. The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

Activity

Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required for only voice services. l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1. l Uplink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Max Throughput(kbit/s)


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


521



Parameter

Meaning

Min Throughput(kbit/s)


Average Throughput(kbit/s)




Select Service

Indicates the type of a service that processes on a specific network.

----End

8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types This section describes how to create a new multi-mode terminal type for planning and analysis on multi-mode networks.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


522



If you need to...

Then...

Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > RAT. type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. 3. Set parameters of the new terminal type. l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal types. l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal types. l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD terminal types. l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > Modify an existing terminal Network system > An existing terminal type. type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. 3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type. Step 3 Click OK. ----End

8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters separately.





523




8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your requirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedure l


On the toolbar, select Template Management from the dropdown list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.


2.


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


524



Such as l

.



2.

Set properties of the BTS template. – For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates. – For details about setting the properties of an GSM base station template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates. – For details about setting the properties of an UMTS base station template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

3. l

Click OK.



2.


3.

Query and modify properties of the base station template. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an GSM base station template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates. – For details about querying and modifying the properties of an UMTS base station template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

4.

Click OK.

----End


8.7.4 Creating Repeaters This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides, that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


525






8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. You must set parameters for multi-mode cells if the transceiver is a multi-mode transceiver.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x. Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page. l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells. l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells. l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and channel quality.

8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


526



prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by learning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of Coverage Prediction Counters in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This section describes the meaning of each coverage prediction counter. The coverage prediction counters in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network are as follows: l

CoverageBySignelLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal chip power is greater than the sensitivity of the receiver) of a cell.

l

CoverageByCirLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal CIR is greater than the specified threshold) of a cell.

Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 8-4 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net. Figure 8-4 Procedure of prediction

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


527



Prediction Algorithm in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, the prediction is performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network. Therefore, for details about the prediction algorithm, see GSM Prediction Algorithm and UMTS Prediction Algorithm.



l


The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss which is included into the total loss of the base station. Table 8-3 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas. Table 8-3 Meanings of factors in the formulas Factor

Meaning









Path loss


Shadow fading


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


528



Factor

Meaning

Penetration loss







Prerequisites l


l




l


Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


529



If you need to...

Then...

Calculate


Calculate forcibly




Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Event Viewer

----End

Follow-up Procedure The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation directory. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


530



8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.



2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Click OK.


Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of parameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


531



Step 7 Click OK. Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group. ----End



Procedure l


l


----End




2.


3.




2.




2.


3.

Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


532


8 Multi-Mode Network Planning NOTE


4.


5.


----End



2.


3.


4.


5.





l


l


8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by Bin point.

Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.

Context The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


533



Exporting Detailed Prediction Results by Bin Points After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin points in a specified area.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab. Step 2 Select the objects to be exported. If you need to...

Then...





Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported. The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area. Step 5 Click Export. ----End

Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.

Context The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.

8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting its properties. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


534




Meaning

Group Name

Indicates the name of a prediction group, which uniquely identifies a prediction group. The U-Net enters the default name of each new prediction group.

Prediction Type

Selects the prediction of the GSM/UMTS dual-mode network.

Study Selected

Indicates the prediction counter.

Calculate Now

Indicates whether to calculate the prediction counter immediately.

Parameters in the Group Properties dialog box Table 8-4 Parameters on the General tab Page Parameter

Meaning

Name


Resolution(m)




Polygon

Selects the area calculated in prediction.

Technology

Selects both GSM and UMTS.

With Shadow


Indoor Coverage


Table 8-5 Parameters on the GSM tab Page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Meaning

CIRGate(dB)

Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to determine the GSM coverage area based on CIR.

Sensitivity(dBm)

Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.


535



Parameter

Meaning

Terminal

Indicates the type of a terminal.

Service

Indicates the service type.

Table 8-6 Parameters on the UMTS tab Page Parameter

Meaning

CIRGate(dB)

Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to determine the UMTS coverage area based on CIR.

Sensitivity(dBm)

Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.

Terminal

Indicates the type of a terminal.

Service

Indicates the service type.

8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network. The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.

8.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network. Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance. Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency. Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency, reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation. The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results. The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects: l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a neighboring cell of the serving cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

536



l


l


l




l


l




l


l


l




Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


Context

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


537






8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. With this function enabled, the neighboring cell relationships for each cell can be planned automatically. This reduces the number of handovers due to improper neighboring cell configuration. For a hybrid network supporting LTE-FDD, the U-Net plans a GSM/UMTS neighboring cell for blind handover from a LTE-FDD cell.

Context l

The U-Net supports cell planning in GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD dual-mode or multi-mode networks.

l

The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example, in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must be performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.

l

In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, UMTS neighboring cell planning can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-sited GSM cell.

l

On a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network, LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-site GSM or UMTS cell.

l

This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multimode network.

Procedure Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells. Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


538



Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring Cells. ----End

8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, export, and modify neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.





Then...





Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


539



If you need to...

Then...






In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from the shortcut menu..


1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the shortcut menu..

After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the original neighboring cell relationships are updated.

2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export mode. l Incremental Export: Export only the changed neighboring cell relationships. l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships. 3. Click Export. NOTE In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE network when creating MML scripts.



Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


540



If you need to...

Then...







Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


541




Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


542



Figure 8-8 Filter

----End


Description

Intra-Frequency


Inter-Frequency


Inter-RAT


The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the actual tab page. Table 8-8 Parameter description

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Neighbor Name



543



Parameter

Description

Cause


Confirm


Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



544


9 FAQ

9

FAQ

About This Chapter This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net. 9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net. 9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download installation packages from huawei support website. 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this section. 9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been installed. 9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating system. 9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


545


9 FAQ

to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView function. 9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. 9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the following information if the preceding problem occurs. 9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can refer to this section when a project fails to be created.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


546


9 FAQ

9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.

Question How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?

Answer The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the software to be installed based on the U-Net version. If...

Then...

The U-Net 3.5 is to be installed

l Install the Microsoft Office 2003. l Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework2.0.

The U-Net 3.6 or U-Net 3.7 is to be installed

Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework3.5.

The U-Net 3.8 is to be installed

Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and download the .NET Framework4.0.

The Volcano propagation model is required

Contact Siradel to purchase Volcano 3.1.2 or a later version.

----End

9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download installation packages from huawei support website.

Question How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


547


9 FAQ

Answer Step 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as shown in Figure 9-1. Figure 9-1 GENEX U-Net V300R008C00

l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework) Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet64 Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework) Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework. l Huawei.UNet32 Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework. NOTE

l Normally, Windows XP is a 32-bit operating system. l Windows 7 operating system falls into 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. Right-click My Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view bits of the operating system and select corresponding installation packages.

Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installation packages based on the actual situation. If...

Then...

The .net framework has been installed.

Download the installation package excluding the .net framework.

The .net framework is not installed.

Download the installation package including the .net framework.

----End

9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this section. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


548


9 FAQ

Question How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?

Answer Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown in Figure 9-2. Figure 9-2 Field Mapping area

l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported. l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to be imported. l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it is recommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as a template. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to the U-Net. Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row. If...

Then...

Display IGNORE.

l It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported do not match those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column cannot be imported to the U-Net. l If the fields in the file to be imported match some existing fields in the system. You can click match them.

next to the cell to manually

NOTE l Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported. Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an error message when you click Import. l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that must be matched.

Display existing field names in the system.

It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported match those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column can be imported to the U-Net.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


549


9 FAQ

9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007 This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been installed.

Question When data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboring cell relationships for example. Figure 9-3 Export neighbor relation

Answer Set regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by the Microsoft. If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional language of the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shown in Figure 9-4.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


550


9 FAQ

Figure 9-4 Regional and Language Options

----End

9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains Chinese Characters This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating system.

Question How to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7 operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?

Answer Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


551


9 FAQ

Figure 9-5 Region and Language

Step 2 Click Change system locale. Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select Chinese (Simplified,PRC) from the Current system locale drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 9-6.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


552


9 FAQ

Figure 9-6 Region and Language Settings

Step 4 Restart the PC. ----End

9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView function.

Question How do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts, and other abnormal display events?

Answer Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed. Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


553


9 FAQ

Figure 9-7 Google Earth Options

----End

9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network.

Question The progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve the problem?

Answer If you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long period of time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project. Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


554


9 FAQ

9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the following information if the preceding problem occurs.

Question How to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?

Answer The MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net to draw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by default except the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file in the System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. ----End

9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can refer to this section when a project fails to be created.

Question How do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure 9-8 is displayed? Figure 9-8 Creating project failed

Answer Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


555


9 FAQ

Step 2 Type regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll in the dialog box. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Restart the computer. ----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


556


10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions

10

U-Net Auxiliary Functions

About This Chapter The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display. 10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left, or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does not change. 10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool. 10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points. 10.4 Querying the Legend Information This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window. You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results, and capacity simulation results in the map window. 10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons) and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and reduces the workload of field survey. 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported, the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


557



10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the actual geographic data. 10.8 Managing Table Windows You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information provided in this section. 10.9 Managing Docked Windows The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of docked windows. 10.10 Managing the Explorer Window The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large amount of data. 10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly identify a base station. 10.12 Searching Sites and Cells This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell, or repeater in the map window. 10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize a grouping mode. 10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency. 10.15 Printing Planning Results You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network construction. 10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value. 10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


558



This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


559



10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left, or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does not change.

Procedure l

Zoom in on or zoom out on a map. You can zoom in on and zoom out on a map by changing the position of the mouse pointer. 1.

Click

on the toolbar to zoom in on or zoom out on a map.

2.

Click on the map. – Click in the map window to zoom in on the map. – Right-click in the map window to zoom out on the map. TIP

l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on the map. l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out to zoom in on or zoom out on the map.

l

Magnify an area on a map. 1.

Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Define a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.

2.

Click a corner of the area to be magnified on the map.

3.

Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area. Release the mouse button. Then, the selected area is magnified.

l

Select a scaling. on the toolbar.

1.

Click

2.

Select a scaling from the drop-down list box. If the required scaling is not available in the list, you can click , type the required scaling in the box, and press Enter. The UNet zooms in on or zooms out on the map based on the specified scaling.

l

l

Move a map. 1.

Click

2.

Move the mouse pointer to the map and drag the map to the required direction.

on the toolbar.

Center the map. – To enable the map to center on the map, click

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


on the toolbar. 560



– To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object in the Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu. ----End

10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.

Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Distance Measurement from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance. Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a red dotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointer and the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time. Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance. Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuous line. Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to add several points to form a folding line. Then, the following information is displayed in the status bar: Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the first point and the last point Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement. ----End

10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points.


on the toolbar in the U-Net main interface.

The Terrain View window is displayed in the U-Net main interface. Step 2 Click in the map window to determine the start point of the terrain analysis line. After determining the start point, move the cursor. A dotted line appears between the cursor and the start point. Right-click to exit the drawing of the terrain analysis line. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


561



Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line. After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points. The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window. NOTE

l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line. l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysis line disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.

Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window: l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter. l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver. l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings. l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter. After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and display the terrain profile. Figure 10-1 Terrain View window

----End

10.4 Querying the Legend Information This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window. You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results, and capacity simulation results in the map window.

Context You can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example, during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficult to query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object to display or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then, only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window. This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. The procedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying the legend information about the prediction results. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


562



Procedure Step 1 Select a legend object. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Click the Display tab.

5.

In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required. NOTE

The non-selected object will not be displayed in the legend window.

If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define new objects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you can select the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the system creates the new legend object automatically. 6.

Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.

7.

Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.

Step 2 Set the display parameters of the legend. You can set the color, description, and value range of a legend in the object list. Step 3 Query the legend information. Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed. After the prediction calculation is complete, the description information and color of all the selected legend objects in the project are displayed in the legend window. ----End

10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons) and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and reduces the workload of field survey.

Prerequisites l

A coordinate system is available.

l

The PC is connected to the Internet.


on the toolbar. The Earth View dialog box is displayed.

You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


563



Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth. Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth. Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file. By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name is UNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click

to reset the path to save the file and the file name.

----End


After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in threedimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.

l

After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way, the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.

l

After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described in Step 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion of the modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the Google Earth.

Figure 10-2 Three-dimensional display of objects on the Google Earth

10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported, the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


564



select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.


Context A map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can also be clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on the definition and transparency of the upper layers. On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodes under the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequence of each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer. You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of these layers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the map window.

Procedure l

Select the layer objects to be displayed. In the Explorer window, you can select or clear the check box of a layer object to display or hide the layer object. For example, if you select the check box of Map on the Geo tab page, all the layers corresponding to the nodes under the Map node are displayed in the map window. If you clear the check box of a node under the Map node, the layer corresponding to the node is hidden in the map window. NOTE

The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.

l

Adjust the position of a layer. During network planning, the U-Net supports the offset of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights. This enables users to adjust the map and positions of the sites.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

1.


2.


3.

Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is displayed.. See Figure 10-3.


565



Figure 10-3 Adjust Map

4.

Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list. If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at the northern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinates at the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset of the layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer is displayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer is selected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and X Offset. NOTE

For the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates of corresponding layers.

5.

Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clicking Up, Down, Left, or Right. The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.

6.

Click Close. The layer position adjustment is complete. The positions of layers are refreshed in the map window accordingly.

l

Adjust the display sequence of layers. 1.

On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to the target layer objects under the Map node. The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights.

2.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Click a layer object and drag it to the new position.


566



The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed when you release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshes the display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence. ----End

10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the actual geographic data.


Procedure Step 1 Select the objects to be exported. If you need to...

Then...

Export 1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to be overlapped layers exported under the Map node. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Map. Export a single layer

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.

Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the area for export. l Full Map: exports the entire map. l A polygon: exports the external rectangular area of a polygon. Step 4 Set the resolution for export. l Origin Map Scale: exports images according to the original resolution of the geographic data. l Current Map Scale: exports images according to the display resolution of the geographic data in the map window. Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file. TIP

The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save path has sufficient free disk space.

Step 6 Click Save. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


567



10.8 Managing Table Windows You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information provided in this section.

Procedure l

Table 10-1 lists the common operations provided in a table window. Table 10-1 Common operations provided in a table window If...

Then...

Close a table window.

Click

Display a table window at the very front.

Double-click the title of the table window.

Switch a table window.

Click the tab title. Alternatively, you can click on the right and then select the required table window from the drop-down list.

Drag a column in a table window.

Click the column name to select it. Then, click the column name again, hold the left mouse button, and drag the column to the required position when the mouse arrow

.

Usually, table windows are displayed as tabs in the working area of the U-Net main window.

changes to

.

Not all the table windows support this function. l

Table 10-2 describes the shortcut menus provided in a table window. NOTE

If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in the table window or the function is currently unavailable.

Table 10-2 Shortcut menus provided in a table window Name

Description

Import

Imports a file in the .txt, .csv, .xls, or .xlsx format. NOTE l If a file fails to be imported, check whether the parameter names in the file to be imported match those in the table window. l You can right-click in a table window and then choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu to display all the parameter names of the current table.

Export

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The file exported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

568



Name

Description

Record Properties

Displays the property panel of the NE corresponding to the selected cell.

Table Fields

Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is used for setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, and Cell tables. You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modify a customized field. For parameter description, see 10.17.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.

Display Columns

Opens the Columns to be displayed window, which is used to show or hide table columns.

Hide Columns

Hides the currently selected column. After performing this operation, you can use the Display Columns function to show the column again. TIP You can click a column title to select the column.

Freeze Columns

Freezes the currently selected column. A frozen column is displayed as the first column in a table. When you view table data, the frozen column is displayed in the window all the time for viewing.

Unfreeze all Columns

Unfreezes a frozen column. l This function is available after you perform the Freeze Columns operation. l Before performing this operation, you must select a table column.

Copy

Copies selected data.

Paste

Pastes data.

Delete

Deletes data in the selected row.

Filter by Selection

Filters data according to the selected cell. Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of the selected cell. If the data is consistent, the system displays the data record corresponding to the selected cell. TIP You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform data filtering. If the data of any cell is the same as that of other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


569



Name

Description

Filter Excluding Selection

Filters data reversely according to the selected cell. l Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of the selected cell. If the data is different, the system displays the data record corresponding to the selected cell. l You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform data reverse filtering. If the data is not the same as that of other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.

Remove Filter

Removes all the filter conditions. This function is available after you perform the Filter by Selection or Filter Excluding Selection operation.

Sort Ascending

Sorts table data in the selected column in ascending order.

Sort Descending

Sorts table data in the selected column in descending order.

NOTE

The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order of columns, row height, and column width.

----End

10.9 Managing Docked Windows The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of docked windows.

Procedure l

Display a docked window. – If you want to display a docked window, select Window > Name of the docked window. – If you do not want to display a docked window, deselect Window > Name of the docked window.

l

Hide a docked window. When a docked window is not active, you can click at the upper right corner of the window to hide it at the window border. When you place the pointer at the corresponding position of the window border, the system automatically displays the docked window. When you move the pointer away, the system automatically hides the docked window. at the upper right To undo the operation of hiding a docked window, you can click corner of the window. Then, the hidden docked window is displayed.

l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Float a docked window.


570



Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away from the dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, the docked window returns to the previous dock area. You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar. ----End

10.10 Managing the Explorer Window The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large amount of data.

Context The Explorer window provides the following sections: l

GEO (

l

Data (

l

Network (

l

Operation (

), which provides entries to geographic data management ), which provides entries to radio data management and calculation ), which provides entries to engineering parameter management ), which provides entries to prediction, simulation, and planning.

For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes only the basic operations of the Explorer window.

Procedure l

Switch to a specific section in the Explorer window. Click a tab in the Explorer window to switch to the corresponding section. For example, to display the Data section, click the Data tab.

l

Expand or collapse a section in the Explorer window. The objects are organized in the form of nodes in each section. Any section that contains one or more object nodes has an expand button ( ) or a collapse button ( ) next to the section name. To expand a section, click next to the section name.

l

Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the node corresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object can be clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results except one prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed. The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain this operation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab. The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


571


10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions NOTE

l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation. l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to a node is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hidden under this node.

----End

10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly identify a base station.

Context The method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. This section takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver. Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Follow-up Procedure All the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.

10.12 Searching Sites and Cells This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell, or repeater in the map window.

Procedure l

Search a site or a cell by using the toolbar. 1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 10-4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

572



Figure 10-4 Find

2.

Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5. Figure 10-5 Name

3.

Click Enter. The U-Net automatically locates the NE in the map window.

l

Search a site or a cell in the corresponding search window. 1.


2.


3.

Choose Find from the shortcut menu. The Find Transceiver dialog box is displayed.

4.

Set search conditions. For details, see 10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations.

5.

Click Find. The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.

6.

Click Geometry to locate the selected cell in the map window.

----End


Export base station data. In the Find Transceiver dialog box, click Export to export data of the located base station. For detailed operations, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.

l

Delete a transceiver. Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.

l

View transceiver data. Click Open in the Find Transceiver dialog box to view transceiver parameters.

10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize a grouping mode. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


573



Procedure Step 1 Select a grouping mode. If...

Then...

The predefined grouping modes meet your requirements

Go to Step 3.

The predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements

Customize a grouping mode. Go to Step 2.

Grouping modes are Go to Step 6 to set the grouping modes to be displayed. not displayed after you choose Group By from the shortcut menu Step 2 Customize a grouping mode. 1.


2.

In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.

3.

Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

4.

Right-click the table and choose Table Fields from the shortcut menu. The Transceiver Table Fields dialog box is displayed.

5.

Click Add. The Field Define dialog box is displayed.

6.

Set a new grouping mode. l Group: name of the customized group. In normal cases, you do not need to set this parameter. l Legend: field name. If you type a new field name in the text box, the field name is displayed in the table. l Type: field type. You can select Text, Integer, Double, or True/False from the dropdown list box. l Size: length of the field name. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set to Text. l Default Value: You are advised to retain the default setting of this parameter. l Choice List: field value. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set to Text, Integer, or Double. You can type the value of each field in the Choice List text box and separate them by pressing Enter.

7.

Click OK. The new grouping mode takes effect.

Step 3 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab. Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


574



Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu. The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode. Step 6 Customize the grouping modes to be displayed. 1.


2.

Select Site or Transceiver in the navigation tree.

3.

Right-click Site or Transceiver and choose Group By > More from the shortcut menu. The GroupBy Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. The following takes the Site node for example. Figure 10-6 GroupBy Config dialog box

4.

In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to be displayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.

5.

Click OK. NOTE

You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.

----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


575



Follow-up Procedure After the grouping is complete, view the grouping result. Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.

10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.

Prerequisites The value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment or engineering parameter import.

Procedure on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown in Step 1 Click Figure 10-7. Figure 10-7 Show Cell Hexagon

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


576



l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location. l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears. Step 2 Click

again. The cellular grid in the map window disappears.

NOTE

The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. After the value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is also changed.

----End

10.15 Printing Planning Results You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network construction.

10.15.1 Print Suggestions The appearance of a map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects included in the map window. On the U-Net, objects are arranged in layers. The top layers on the map can be clearly displayed and printed. The visibility of the bottom layers depends on the definition and transparency of the top layers. On the U-Net, the visible objects (such as sites, cells, prediction results, and capacity simulation results) on the Data tab page are more clearly displayed than the visible objects on the Geo tab page. You are advised to arrange layers on the Geo tab page in the following sequence from top to bottom. Thus, the vector layer can be clearly printed. l

Points (vector)

l

Highways and lines (vector)

l

Geographic data about clutter classes (transparent grid)

l

Satellite maps or geographic data about clutter heights (non-transparent) NOTE

For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.

10.15.2 Printing Maps Before printing a map, you can set the print properties such as print area and print layout based on the actual requirements. After making the settings, you can select a printer to print the map.

Context Before printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect. l

You can print either an entire map or a part of a map.

l

You can use the default print layout or change it as required.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


577



Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a title or mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.

Procedure Step 1 Set the print layout. 1.

Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the target print template in the Print Template area. For detailed operations on print templates, see 10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template.

3.

Set print properties in the Print Setting area. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.

4.

Preview the print effect in the Preview area.

Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number of copies to print. You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file. Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print. The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds the paper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages. ----End


Export the print template After setting the print layout, click Export in the Print Setting dialog box to export the print properties of the selected print template as a .cfg configuration file for future use.

l

Import the print template Click Import to import the print template.

10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template The system provides three types of pre-defined print templates. If these print templates cannot meet your requirements, you can customize a print template.

Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click Add to create a print template. The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the Print Template area. Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template. For details, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties. Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfg configuration file for future use. ----End Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


578




Delete a print template. You can click Delete to delete a selected template. However, you cannot delete the last template.

l

Import a print template. 1.

Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.

3.

Click Open. NOTE

If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the system displays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.

10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.

10.16.1 Importing DT Data The U-Net enables you to import DT data for calibrating propagation models.

Prerequisites l


l


l

Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using the GENEX Probe.

l

For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and filtering DT data.

l

DT data is classified into two types: Drive Test and CW Measurement.

l

This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.

Context

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported. Step 5 Click Open. The Import File dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Set import parameters. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


579



l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.17.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data. l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data. Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data. l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window. In this case, pay attention to the prompts. l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CW Measurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree. ----End


View and edit a DT site. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, you can view and edit DT site properties or delete a single DT site. For parameter description, see 10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.

l

Delete a DT file. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

l

Move a DT site in the map window. You can directly select a DT site in the map window and then drag it.

l

Set the display effect of a DT site. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. For parameter description, see 10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points.

10.16.2 Filtering DT Data After the DT data is imported, you can filter data according to the cell features so that you can filter out the DT points that are incorrect or not required. The U-Net supports filtering based on the level, the distance between the DT point and the cell, the azimuth of the sector, and the clutter class.

Prerequisites l


l

The DT data is imported.

l

This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


580



Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Set filtering conditions. NOTE

The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.

l Distance area, set the maximum and minimum distance between DT points and the cell. If the distance between a DT point and the cell is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point is not filtered out. l Measurement area, set the maximum and minimum receive level of DT points. If the receive level of a DT point is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point is not filtered out. l Azimuth area, set the azimuth of the sector. The azimuth is the angle between the DT point and the north direction of the map. You can set multiple filtering conditions related to the azimuth. In the Azimuth List list, the data within the range of [Start,End] is not filtered out. l In the Clutter area, select a clutter class. The DT points related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out. Select All: Select clutter types in batches. Select None: Clear clutter types in batches. For details about the parameters, see 10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data. Step 5 Determine whether to select Delete Outside Points. If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered out; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT points that are filtered out in the filtering results. Step 6 Click OK to filter the DT data. ----End

Follow-up Procedure After the filtering, you can view the filtering results. 1.

In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.

2.

Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

3.

Check the filtering results.

10.16.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches This section describes how to filter drive test (DT) data in batches. You can filter DT data by cell to view the required data of cells.

Prerequisites 1.


2.

The DT data has been imported.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


581



Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree. NOTE

The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.

Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT data window is displayed. Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required. If...

Then...

You want to view the data of a cell

In the DT data window, right-click a cell whose data needs to be viewed and choose Filter by Selection from the shortcut menu. The data of only the selected cell is displayed in the DT data window.

You want to view the data of other cells except for the selected cell

In the DT data window, right-click the cell whose data does not need to be viewed and choose Filter Excluding Selection from the shortcut menu. The data of all cells except for the selected cell is displayed in the DT data window.

You want to view the data of one or more cells

1. Select the cells that need to be displayed from the Serving Cell drop-down list box in the DT data window. 2. Click OK. The data of the selected cells is displayed in the DT data window.

NOTE

You can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to remove the filter effect.

----End

10.16.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data Common propagation models cannot meet the requirements of actual networking scenarios that feature complicated terrain conditions. To prevent the great path loss error caused by using a common propagation model for calculation, you must adjust the coefficients of the propagation model before service planning. In this way, you can obtain a propagation model suitable for the actual network environment. Currently, the U-Net enables you to calibrate only the SPM2G, SPM900 and Volcano propagation models.

Prerequisites The CW Measurement data is imported. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


582



Context The purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagation model by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagation calibration based on the CW measurement data only. The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows: l

Average error: Average value of the prediction error.

l

Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the average error.

l

Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data and the data calculated by the propagation model.

Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculated by the propagation model. If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that the calibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select the propagation model to be calibrated in Select Propagation Model. Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File. Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation. l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is considered. If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated. l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB. Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in the case of hilly areas. l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default value is 75%. Step 7 Select the coefficients of the propagation model to be calibrated. You can calibrate the coefficients of the propagation model one by one until you obtain the desired propagation model. Alternatively, you can also calibrate all the coefficients at a time. Step 8 Click Calibrate to start the calibration. After the calibration, the Result window is displayed. Step 9 Query the calibration results. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


583



If...

Then...

The calibrated propagation model meets your requirements

Click Commit to make the calibration results take effect.

The calibrated propagation model does not meet your requirements

Click Next to select other coefficients for calibration until you obtain the desired propagation model. The calibration operations are the same as Step 7 to Step 9.

----End

10.16.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model To check whether the parameter settings of the propagation model are appropriate, use the propagation model to calculate the signal strength at each drive test point, and compare the calculation results with the actual drive test results.

Prerequisites The CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported. NOTE

If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met: l

The propagation model has been calibrated.

l

The calibration of the propagation model has taken effect.

Context This section uses the CW measurement data as an example.

Procedure Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab. Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Step 3 Choose Calculate Signal Levels from the shortcut menu. Note the messages displayed in the Event Viewer window. Step 4 After the calculation is completed, In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Step 5 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. l The table lists the actual signal strength at each drive test point, signal strength at each drive test point calculated by the calibrated propagation model, and the difference between the two values. l For details about the parameters in the table, see 10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information. Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


584



Step 6 Optional: Display the drive test results in a graphic window. 1.

In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.

2.

Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu. l The system displays a graphic window, which lists the drive test results. l You can select a display object from the drop-down list in the upper right corner of the graphic window, for example, the actual DT data M(dBm), calculated theoretical data P(dBm), and the difference value Error(P-M)(dB) between the two. In addition, you can view the CDF curve P-M(CDF) for the DT data and theoretical data M,P(dBm) or the difference value. l When you click a drive test point in the graphic window, the information about the drive test point is displayed in the GIS window and the table.

----End

10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.

10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth This section describes the parameters for connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files. You can refer to this section when connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files in the Earth View dialog box. Parameter

Description

Value

Sites

Indicates whether to export information about base stations to the Google Earth.

By default, this option is selected.

Export Sites

Indicates the base stations to be displayed.

The default value is Full Map.

You can select all the base stations in the entire map or the base stations in a selected polygon. You can also select only a specified base station.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Transceiver Radius

Indicates the radius of cell icons in Google Earth.

The value range is from 1 to 1,000 and the unit is meter. The default value is 50.

Polygons

Indicates whether to export polygons to the Google Earth.


Predictions

Indicates whether to export the prediction results to the Google Earth.


Transparency

Indicates the transparency of the prediction results on the Google Earth.



585



Parameter

Description

Value

Simulation Users

Indicates whether to export the capacity simulation results to the Google Earth.


Drive Test

Indicates whether to export DT data to the Google Earth.


CW Measurement

Indicates whether to export CW test data to the Google Earth.


10.17.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields This section describes the parameters for setting custom fields. You can refer to this section when setting parameters for custom fields in the Field Define window.

Parameters in the Field Define Window Parameter

Description

Group

This parameter is not in use. You do not need to set it.

Legend

Indicates the name of a custom field.

Type

Indicates the data type of a custom field.

Size

If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where you can set the text length. The value range is from 1 to 300. If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.

Default Value

Indicates the default value of a custom field.

Choice List

Indicates other values of a custom field. l After you set Choice List, a drop-down list is provided for the field. Then, you can set the field to Default Value or values in Choice List. l When entering values in Choice List, press Enter after entering a value to enter another value. l If True/False is selected as the data type, the default values in Choice List are True and False, which cannot be modified.

10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations This section describes the parameters for searching for base stations. You can refer to this section when searching for base stations in the Find Transceiver dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


586



Parameter

Description

Filter

Area

Displays the available area for the filtering.

First row of parameters

Indicates the first filtering condition. l Select a network parameter from the first dropdown list. l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list. l Type a value in the text box. The filtering condition takes effect only after the corresponding check box is selected.

Second row of parameters

Indicates the second filtering condition. l Select an antenna- or equipment-related parameter from the first drop-down list. l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list. l Select an antenna- or equipment-related value from the third drop-down list. The filtering condition takes effect only after the corresponding check box is selected.

Condition

Indicates the relation between the two filtering conditions. l And l Or

Result

Displays the searching result. The result is valid only after you click Find.

10.17.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of base stations. You can refer to this section when setting the base station display properties in the Display Field dialog box.

Parameters in the Display Field dialog box Table 10-3 Parameters on the Label Display tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Available Fields

Lists the parameters that can be displayed in the map window.


587



Parameter

Description

Selected Fields

Lists the selected parameters. The selected parameters are displayed in the map window. You can select the parameters to be displayed in the map window by using >, >>, <, and << buttons.

Table 10-4 Parameters on the Group By Display tab page Parameter

Description

Display Type

Indicates the group type. l If Automatic is selected, the U-Net automatically sets different colors for displaying each transceiver after you in the U-Net main window. click l If Default is selected, the default display settings are used for all transceivers. l If GroupBy is selected, the display style is set for the transceivers that are grouped by the specified type. You can right-click Transceiver and choose Group By from the shortcut menu on the Network tab page in the browse window to specify the type by which the transceivers are grouped. NOTE If transceivers have been grouped, the items in the table are consistent with the group. When Group By is selected for the first time, the system automatically sets a color for each group.

l If DisCreteValue is selected, the transceivers are grouped by certain property such as name and you can set the display style for each transceiver group separately. In addition, you need to select a property from the Field drop-down list. l If ValueIntervals is selected, the display style is set for the transceivers within the property ranges. In addition, you need to select a property from the Field drop-down list and set Min Value and Max Value in the display style list. NOTE The method for setting the display style of Site is similar to that of Transceiver. The grouping types available are only Default and GroupBy.

Field

Indicates the NE property field. This parameter is valid when Display Type is DisCreteValue or ValueIntervals.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


588



Parameter

Description

Indicates the legend cell.

Double-click the legend cell. In the displayed Display dialog box, set parameters such as the NE display color.

For example,

Parameters in the Display dialog box describes the parameters. . Legend

Indicates the legend description.

Actions

l You can select Shading for the U-Net to automatically set the display properties according to the step length set by users. l You can select Export Legend to export the preset display properties. l You can select Import Legend to import the preset display properties.

Parameters in the Display dialog box Table 10-5 Parameters on the Symbol Style tab page Parameter

Description

Color

Indicates the display color of base stations or transceivers.

Selected Color

Indicates the display color of the selected base stations or transceivers.

Size

Indicates the display size of base stations or transceivers.

Symbol

Indicates the display shape of base stations or transceivers.

Example

Previews the display of base stations or transceivers.

Table 10-6 Parameters on the Font tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Color

Indicates the display color of parameters related to base stations or cells.

Font

Indicates the display font of parameters related to base stations or cells.

Size

Indicates the display size of parameters related to base stations or cells.

Style

Indicates the display style of parameters related to base stations or cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

589



Parameter

Description

Example

Previews the display of parameters related to base stations or cells.

10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data This section describes the parameters for importing or exporting data such as site data, cell data, and carrier data. You can refer to this section when exporting data in the Data Export dialog box or importing data in the Data Import dialog box.

Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Configuration File

Indicates a configuration file template. Users can save the specified export fields as a template and import this template in the future by loading. l Save: saves a template. l Load: loads a template.

Header

Indicates whether to export a field name.

Field Separator

Indicates the method of separating fields. l : Separates fields with tab characters. l ,: Separates fields with commas. l ;: Separates fields with semicolons. l : Separates fields with space characters.

Available Fields

Displays the existing fields in the current project.

Exported Fields

Displays the fields to be exported to the station data file.

Preview

Previews the data export effect.

Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Configuration File

Indicates the path of a configuration file. A configuration file saves the field mapping information. l Click Save to save the current field mapping information as a configuration file. l Click Load to import an existing configuration file. Then, the U-Net can use the existing field mapping information.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


590



Parameter

Description

1st. Data Row

Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this row and the subsequent rows is imported.

Field Separator

Indicates the method of separating fields. l : Separates fields with tab characters. l ,: Separates fields with commas. l ;: Separates fields with semicolons. l : Separates fields with space characters.

Update Records

Indicates whether to overwrite the existing data in the project. For example, a site with Site Name set to xxx exists in the UNet. A site with Site Name set to xxx also exists in the file to be imported. If you select Update Records, the parameters related to the site xxx will be updated.

Field Mappin g

Source

Indicates the fields of the file to be imported.

Destination

Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file to be imported. If no match field is available, is displayed. If a field of the file to be imported matches an existing field, the existing field name is displayed. l The system automatically matches the fields in the file to be imported with the fields provided by the U-Net. If a field in the file to be imported does not match any field in the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the file to be imported matches a field in the U-Net, the field name in the U-Net is displayed. l You can click in the Destination row, and then manually select a field from the drop-down list box to match the field in the Source row.

10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties This section describes the parameters for setting the print properties. You can refer to this section when setting the print properties in the Print Setting dialog box.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Parameter

Description

Print Template area

The existing print templates are listed in this area.

Add

Enables you to add a print template.

Delete

Enables you to delete a selected print template.


591



Parameter

Description

Page tab page

Name

Indicates the template name.

Orientation

Indicates the page orientation. l Portrait: prints a document with the short edge of the paper at the top of the page. l Landscape: prints a document with the long edge of the paper at the top of the page.

Paper

Indicates the paper size and source. l Size: indicates the paper size. l Source: indicates the paper source.

Scaling

Indicates the map scale. l Fit to Page: indicates that the selected map area is automatically adjusted to a proper size. l Scale: indicates that the selected map area is printed according to the typed scale.

Margins

Indicates the page margins. The unit is millimeter.

Com pone nts tab page

Map

Rulers: indicates whether to print the map ruler. Select the print area in Print Area.

Legend

Indicates whether to print the legend information. Position: indicates the legend position.

Comments

Indicates whether to add comments. l Position: indicates the position of the selected object. l Comments are typed in the text box. l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is displayed on the map. l Properties: indicates the properties such as content and character formats.

Hea der/ Foot er tab page

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Logo1 and Logo2

Indicates whether to add logos. you can add two logos at most. l Position: indicates the position of the selected object. l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is displayed on the map. You can click Properties to set the size of the logo. The size unit is millimeter. You can also click File to select the file that contains the logo.


592



Parameter

Description

Title

Indicates whether the title is displayed on the map. l Position: indicates the position of the selected object. l The contents of the title are typed in the text box. l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is displayed on the map. l Properties: indicates the properties such as content and character formats.

Header/Footer

Indicates whether to add the header and footer. l Position: indicates the position of the selected object. l The contents of the header or footer are typed in the text box. l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is displayed on the map. l Properties: indicates the properties such as content and character formats.

Prev iew area

Import

Enables you to import an existing print setting template.

Export

Enables you to export the current print settings as a template.

Printer

Enables you to set a printer.

Preview

Enables you to preview.

Print

Enables you to perform a print task.

NOTE

The default values of the preceding parameters vary with the templates.

10.17.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data This section describes the parameters for importing drive test (DT) data. You can refer to this section when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box to import DT data. Parameter

Description

Remarks

Configuration File

Indicates the path of a configuration file.

l Click Save to save the current field mapping information as a configuration file.

A configuration file saves the field mapping information.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

l Click Load to import an existing configuration file. Then, the U-Net can use the existing field mapping information.


593



Parameter

Description

Remarks

1st. Data Row

Indicates the starting row of In normal cases, the first row in the the data for import. Data in imported file is a title. Therefore, this row and the subsequent import the file from its second row. rows is imported.

Field Separator

Indicates the method of separating fields.

-

l : Separates fields with tab characters. l ,: Separates fields with commas. l ;: Separates fields with semicolons. l : Separates fields with space characters. Receiver

Height

Height of a receiver.

The default value is 2, and the unit is meter.

Gain

Gain of a receiver.

The default value is 0, and the unit is dB.

Loss

Path loss of a receiver.


Network type.

-

Network Type

This parameter is configurable only for a multi-mode network. Match Mode

This parameter is displayed only when Network Type is set to GSM. The default value is BCCH+BSIC.

You can select LAC+CI or BCCH +BSIC for importing the DT data as required.

l Select BCCH+BSIC when DT files are generated using the Assistant or Probe, and BCCH and BSIC in the source DT files uniquely identify a GSM cell. l Select LAC+CI when DT files are generated using the TEMS, and LAC and CI in the source DT files uniquely identify a GSM cell.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


594



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Config Columns

When you click Config l The drop-down list box in the Columns, the Character dialog box contains the field names Column Mapping Form in the to-be-imported DT file. dialog box is displayed, in l You can manually set the which you can set the mappings between the field names mappings between the field in the U-Net and those in the DT names in the imported DT file. file and those in the U-Net. l Mappings of the Longitude and Latitude fields must be set irrespective of the RAT. l For the LTE network, the Signal Level and PCI fields are mandatory in the dialog box. You must set the mappings between the two fields and those in the DT file. Otherwise, DT data cannot be imported. The PCI field in the dialog box needs to map the PCI field in the DT file for the U-Net to locate cells. l For the GSM network, the BCCH, BSIC, and Signal Level fields are mandatory in the dialog box. You must set the mappings between the three fields and those in the DT file. Otherwise, DT data cannot be imported. The BCCH field in the dialog box needs to map the BCCH field in the DT file for the U-Net to locate the ARFCNs in the DT file, and the BSIC field in the dialog box needs to map the BSIC field in the DT file for the UNet to locate cells. l For the UMTS network, the Signal Level and Scrambling Code fields are mandatory in the dialog box. You must set the mappings between the two fields and those in the DT file. Otherwise, DT data cannot be imported. The Scrambling Code field in the UNet needs to map the Scrambling Code field in the DT file for the UNet to locate cells. l The U-Net automatically places the DT data under the

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


595



Parameter

Description

Remarks corresponding cells based on the scrambling code.

Field Mapping

Source


Destinati on

Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file to be imported.

Lazy Import

Delayed import.

The system automatically matches the fields in the DT data with the fields provided by the U-Net. If a field in the DT data file does not match any field in the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the DT data file matches a field in the U-Net, the field name in the U-Net is displayed. If this option is selected, data is not imported immediately after you click Import. The data is read after the DT feature database is verified.

10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data This section describes the parameters for importing CW Measurement data. You can refer to this section when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box for importing CW Measurement data. Parameter

Description

Remarks

Configuration File

Indicates the path of a configuration file.

l Click Save to save the current field mapping information as a configuration file.

A configuration file saves the field mapping information.

1st. Data Row

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this row and the subsequent rows is imported.

l Click Load to import an existing configuration file. Then, the U-Net can use the existing field mapping information. In normal cases, the first row in the imported file is a title. Therefore, import the file from its second row.


596



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Field Separator

Indicates the method of separating fields.

-

l : Separates fields with tab characters. l ,: Separates fields with commas. l ;: Separates fields with semicolons. l : Separates fields with space characters. Reference Cell

Receiver

Field Mapping

Name

Indicates the name of the transceiver corresponding to the CW Measurement data.

CW Measurement data will be imported into the selected transceiver.

Frequenc y

Indicates the frequency of the transceiver.

-

Height

Height of a receiver.

The default value is 2, and the unit is meter.

Gain

Gain of a receiver.


Loss

Path loss of a receiver.


Source


l The system automatically matches the fields in the file to be imported with the fields provided by the UNet. If a field in the file to be imported does not match any field in the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the file to be imported matches a field in the UNet, the field name in the U-Net is displayed. in the l You can click Destination row, and then manually select a field from the drop-down list box to match the field in the Source row. The Latitude, Longitude, and Signal Level fields are mandatory. These fields must be mapped with the corresponding fields in the U-Net.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


597



Parameter Destinati on

Description

Remarks

Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file to be imported.

Otherwise, importing the CW data fails.

10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information This section describes the parameters for viewing DT point information. Parameter

Description

ID

Indicates the ID of a DT point. This is an internal identification.

Longitude

Indicates the longitude of a DT point. Manual modification is allowed.

Latitude

Indicates the latitude of a DT point. Manual modification is allowed.

Height(m)

Indicates the height where a DT point is located.

Clutter

Indicates the clutter ID and type of a DT point.

Clutter Height

Indicates the clutter height where a DT point is located.

Serving cell

Indicates the cell where the drive test point is located. The parameter exists only in the drive test data.

Distance(m)

Indicates the distance from a DT point to the transceiver that the DT point belongs to.

M(dBm)

Indicates the signal strength measured at a DT point. Manual modification is allowed.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


598



Parameter

Description

P(dBm)

Indicates the signal strength calculated by the calibrated propagation model in a DT point. Manual modification is allowed.

Error(P-M)(dB)

Indicates the difference between the measured value and the calculated value.

10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models This section describes the interface of propagation model calibration results, which helps you to learn the meaning of each area in the window. Figure 10-8 shows the interface of propagation model calibration results. Figure 10-8 Interface of propagation model calibration results

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


599



No.

Name

Description

(1)

Calibration result counter area

This area lists the statistical counters of calibration results. l Average indicates the average error of the calibration. l Standard Deviation indicates the standard deviation of the calibration. l Cor.Coeff.: Indicates the correlation coefficient. If the correlation coefficient is greater, you can infer that the DT data is close to the calculation results of the propagation model. The value range is from 0 to 1. l RMS: Indicates the root mean square of the calibration.

Calibration result table area

(2)

This area lists the coefficient values before and after the calibration. If a coefficient value changes after the calibration, this coefficient is marked in blue.

(3)

Calibration result chart area

This area directly displays the propagation model calibration results in a coordinate chart. l The x-coordinate indicates the propagation distance. l The y-coordinate indicates the path loss value. l Data in red indicates the actual path loss value, which is obtained on the basis of the DT data or CW data. l Data in green indicates the path loss value calculated by the propagation model before the calibration. l Data in blue indicates the path loss value calculated by the propagation model after the calibration.

Button area

(4)

This area provides two buttons, with which you can make the calibration results take effect and perform further calibration.

10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data This section describes the parameters related to the filtering of the drive test (DT) or continuous wave (CW) data. You can refer to this section when setting relevant parameters in the Filter dialog box to import the DT or CW data. NOTE

The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


600



Parameter

Value

Distance area, where data is filtered according to the distance between the DT point and the serving cell

Min Distance

Indicates the minimum distance.

The unit is meter.

Max Distance

Indicates the maximum distance.

The unit is meter.

Measureme nt area, where data is filtered according to the receive level of the DT point.

Min Measurement

Indicates the minimum receive level.

The unit is dBm.

Max Measurement

Indicates the maximum receive level.

The unit is dBm.

Azimuth area, where data is filtered according to the cell azimuth

Start Azimuth

Indicates the start value of the azimuth interval.

The unit is degree. The value must be an integer.

End Azimuth

Indicates the end value of the azimuth interval.

The unit is degree. The value must be an integer.

Add

Adds an azimuth interval.

-

Azimuth List

Lists all azimuth intervals.

-

Remove

Removes the selected azimuth interval.

-

Indicates all the clutter classes in the geographic data.

You can select the clutter classes through the check boxes.

By default, all clutter classes are selected.

Select All/ Select None

Select All/Select None: Select or clear clutter types in batches.

Clutter area, where data is filtered according to the clutter class.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Description

The DT data related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out.


-

601



Parameter Delete Outside Points

-

Description

Value

l If this option is selected, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered out.

By default, this option is not selected.

l If this option is not selected, the system just hides the information about the DT points that are filtered out in the filtering results.

10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of DT points.

Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points Parameter

Description

Display Type

Indicates the display type.

Field Type

Indicates the type of the field to be displayed.

Color

Indicates the color for highlighting a field within a certain value range.

Min

Indicates the minimum value of a field to be displayed.

Max

Indicates the maximum value of a field to be displayed.

Legend

Indicates the value range of a field to be displayed. To display the legends in this row, select the checkbox on the right of the row, for example,

Fast Display

.

Indicates the fast display mode. l If a large amount of DT data is available, you are advised to select this option to quickly update the DT data displayed in the map window. l You can only set the display color and size for DT points after selecting this option.

Add to Legend

Indicates whether to add legend information to the legend window. You can choose Window > Legend to open the legend information window.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


602


11 Acronyms and Abbreviations

11

Acronyms and Abbreviations

This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net. Acronym/Abbreviation

Full Name

A ACP

Automatic Cell Planning

AMS

Adaptive MIMO Switching

ARFCN

Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

B BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel

BER

Bit Error Rate

BLER

Block Error Rate

C C/A

Carrier-to-Adjacent (Ratio)

C/I

Carrier-to-Interference (Ratio)

CDF

Cumulative Distribution Function

CM

Cubic Metric

CME

Configuration Management Express

CW

Continuous Wave

D

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

DEM

Digital Elevation Model

DL

Downlink

DTM

Digital Terrain Model

DT

Drive Test


603



Acronym/Abbreviation

Full Name

F FDD

Frequency Division Duplex

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

G GIS

Geographic Information System

GUI

Graphical User Interface

H HARQ

Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request

HICH

Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

HO

Handover

HR

Half Rate

HS-DSCH

High Speed Downlink Shared Channel

HSN

Hopping Sequence Number

HS-SCCH

High Speed Shared Control Channel

I ICIC

Inter-Cell Interference Coordination

IoT

Interference over Thermal

IP

Internet Protocol

IBCA

Interference Based Channel Allocation

L LTE

Long Term Evolution

M MBMS

Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service

MCS

Modulation and Coding Scheme

MIMO

Multiple Input Multiple Output

N Ncs

Cyclic Shifts

NF

Noise Figure

O OFDM

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing


604




Full Name

P PN

Pseudo-Noise

PAPR

Peak Average Power Ratio

PBCH

Physical Broadcast Channel

PCFICH

Physical Control Format Indicator Channel

PCI

Physical Cell ID

PDCCH

Physical Downlink Control Channel

PDF

Probability Distribution Function

PDSCH

Physical Downlink Shared Channel

PHICH

Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

PMCH

Physical Multicast Channel

PRACH

Physical Random Access Channel

PUCCH

Physical Uplink Control Channel

PUSCH

Physical Uplink Shared Channel

Q QAM

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QPSK

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R RA

Random Access

RB

Resource Block

RE

Resource Element

RRM

Radio Resource Management

RRU

Remote Radio Unit

RSCP

Received Signal Code Power

RSRP

Reference Signal Received Power

RSRQ

Reference Signal Received Quality

RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indicator

RxLev

Received signal level

RxQual

Received Signal Quality

S

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


605




Full Name

SC-FDMA

Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access

SFBC

Spatial Frequency Block Code

SINR

Signal-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio

SPM

Standard Propagation Model

T TA

Tracking Area

TCH

Traffic Channel

TCP

Transfer Control Protocol

TDD

Time Division Duplex

TMA

Tower Mounted Amplifier

TS

Timeslot

TTI

Transmission Time Interval

TSC

Training Sequence Code

U UE

User Equipment

UL

Uplink

V VAMOS

Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One Slot

Z ZC

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

Zadoff-Chu Sequence


606

Genex U-net User Guide(PDF)-En

Recommend Documents